2012 TITAN OWNER'S MANUAL

®

2012 TITAN
OWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN In addition to factory installed options, your ve- Before driving your vehicle, please read this
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with hicle may also be equipped with additional ac- Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-
confidence. It was produced using the latest cessories installed by NISSAN or by your iarity with controls and maintenance require-
techniques and strict quality control. NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your
that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, vehicle.
This manual was prepared to help you under- warnings, cautions and instructions concerning
stand the operation and maintenance of your proper use of such accessories prior to operating WARNING
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome- the vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSAN
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this dealer for details concerning the particular ac- IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-
manual before operating your vehicle. cessories with which your vehicle is equipped. MINDERS FOR SAFETY!
A separate Warranty Information Booklet Follow these important driving rules to
explains details about the warranties cov- help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service for you and your passengers!
and Maintenance Guide” explains details ● NEVER drive under the influence of al-
about maintaining and servicing your ve- cohol or drugs.
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will ● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
explain how to resolve any concerns you and never drive too fast for conditions.
may have with your vehicle, as well as ● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon and avoid using vehicle features or taking
law. other actions that could distract you.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle ● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
best. When you require any service or have any priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the children should be seated in the rear seat.
extensive resources available to them.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

For descriptions specified for four-wheel drive MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This manual includes information for all options
models, a mark is placed at the begin- available on this model. Therefore, you may find
ning of the applicable sections/items. This vehicle should not be modified. some information that does not apply to your
Modification could affect its vehicle.
As with other vehicles with features for performance, safety or durability, and
off-road use, failure to operate four-wheel All information, specifications and illustrations in
may even violate governmental this manual are those in effect at the time of
drive models correctly may result in loss of
regulations. In addition, damage or per- printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
control or an accident. Be sure to read
formance problems resulting from modi- specifications or design without notice and with-
“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-
fications may not be covered under out obligation.
ing and driving” section of this manual.
NISSAN warranties.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV-
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
ING THIS MANUAL
This vehicle will handle and maneuver You will see various symbols in this manual. They
differently from an ordinary passenger are used in the following ways:
car because it has a higher center of
gravity for off-road use. As with other WARNING
vehicles with features of this type, fail- This is used to indicate the presence of a
ure to operate this vehicle correctly may hazard that could cause death or serious
result in loss of control or an accident. personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
Be sure to read “On-pavement and off- precisely.
road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-
ing collision and rollover”, and “Driving CAUTION
safety precautions”, in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual. This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moder-
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 BLUETOOTH௡ is a
WARNING
trademark owned by
WARNING Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
U.S.A. and licensed
and certain vehicle components contain to Visteon.
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de- XM Radio௡ requires
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi- subscription, sold
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear separately. Not avail-
contain or emit chemicals known to the able in Alaska, Hawaii
State of California to cause cancer and or Guam. For more
APD1005 birth defects or other reproductive harm. information, visit
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE www.xmradio.com.
or “Do not let this happen.” ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra- ies, may contain perchlorate material. The
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
vehicle. Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.
© 2011 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
indicate movement or action. Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these permission of Nissan North America, Inc.
call attention to an item in the illustration.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to following information:
For U.S. customers
provide NISSAN directly with comments or Nissan North America, Inc.
– Your name, address, and telephone number
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con- Consumer Affairs Department
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free – Vehicle identification number (attached to the P.O. Box 685003
number: top of the instrument panel on the driver’s Franklin, TN 37068-5003
side)
For U.S. customers For Canadian customers
1-800-NISSAN-1 – Date of purchase Nissan Canada Inc.
(1-800-647-7261) 5290 Orbitor Drive
– Current odometer reading
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
For Canadian customers
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
1-800-387-0122 or via e-mail at:
– Your comments or questions
For U.S. customers
OR nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
For Canadian customers
information.centre@nissancanada.com

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical and consumer information 9
Index 10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS

1. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-15)
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-47)
3. Front seat belts (P. 1-15)
4. Front-seat Active Head Restraints
5. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P. 1-47)
6. Seats (P. 1-2)
7. Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) (P. 1-56)
8. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-60)
9. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-47)
10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) (P. 1-28)
11. Top tether strap anchor point (P. 1-30)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.

LII2021

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Engine hood (P. 3-11)
2. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-27)
3. Windshield (P. 8-19)
4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)
5. Power windows (P. 2-48)
6. Door locks, keyfob, keys
(P. 3-3, 3-7, 3-2)
7. Mirrors (P. 3-17)
8. Tire pressure (P. 9-12)
9. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
10. Tire chains (P. 8-40)
11. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-30)
12. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-29)
13. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-33)
14. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-13)

WII0116

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR

1. Rear sliding window (if so equipped)
(P. 2-51)
2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-13)
3. Tailgate/Truckbox (P. 3-22)
4. Trailer hitch/Towing (if so equipped)
(P. 9-24)
5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-30)
6. Bedside storage compartment
(if so equipped) (P. 2-48)
7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-12, P. 9-3, 9-4)
8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-12)
9. Child safety rear door lock (Crew Cab
models only) (P. 3-7)

LII0027


PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1. DVD entertainment system
2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)
3. Map lights (if so equipped) (P. 2-55)
4. Sun visors (P. 3-15)
5. HomeLinkா (if so equipped) (P. 2-56)
6. Glove box (P. 2-42)
7. Cup holders (P. 2-45)
8. Front seats (P. 1-2)
9. Folding rear bench seat (P. 1-13)

LII0029


INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Vents (P. 4-13)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-29)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio
control/Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System (if so equipped)
(P. 4-54, P. 4-71)
4. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-32)
5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-47, P. 2-34)
6. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator
lights (P. 2-4, 2-13)
7. Cruise control main/set switches
8. Shift selector (column) (if so equipped)
(P. 5-16)
9. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)
10. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2)
11. Navigation system* controls
12. Audio system controls (P. 4-30)
13. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-47)
14. Glove box (P. 2-42)
15. Climate controls (P. 4-14, P. 4-21,
WIC1563 P. 4-28)


16. Aux jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-52) 32. Pedal position adjustment switch
17. Power outlet (P. 2-38) (if so equipped) (P. 3-14)
18. Heated seat switch (if so equipped) 33. Rear power window switch
(P. 2-35) (if so equipped) (P. 2-51)
19. Cup holder (P. 2-45) *: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off er’s Manual (if so equipped).
switch (P. 2-36) See the page number indicated in paren-
21. Tow mode switch (P. 2-38) theses for operating details.
22. Electronic locking rear differential
(E-Lock) system switch
(if so equipped) (P.2-36)
23. Shift selector (console)
24. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)
25. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-56)
26. Power outlet (P. 2-38)
27. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-27)
28. Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-27)
29. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-14)
30. Cargo lamp switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-34)
31. Rear sonar system off switch


ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS

1. Battery (P. 8-14)
2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-21)
3. Transmission dipstick (P. 8-11)
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)
6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-13)
7. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)
8. Drive belt location (P. 8-16)
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)
10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
11. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)
NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0630


WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page
light light light

Anti-lock Braking 2-14 Engine oil pressure 2-15 Electronic locking 2-18
System (ABS) warn- low/engine coolant rear differential (E-
or ing light temperature high Lock) system on
warning light indicator light (if so
equipped)
4WD warning light 2-16
Automatic transmis- 2-14 ( model) Front passenger air 2-19
sion check warning bag status light
light Low fuel warning 2-16
light High beam indicator 2-19
Automatic transmis- 2-14 light (Blue)
sion park warning Low tire pressure 2-16
light ( warning light Malfunction indica- 2-19
model) tor light (MIL)
Master warning light 2-18
Brake warning light 2-14 (if so equipped) Security indicator 2-20
light (if so equipped)
or Seat belt warning 2-18
light and chime Slip indicator light 2-20

Supplemental air 2-19
Charge warning 2-15 bag warning light
light


Indicator Name Page
light

Turn signal/hazard 2-20
indicator lights

Vehicle Dynamic 2-20
Control (VDC) off
indicator light


1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Front manual captain’s chair seat adjustment Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Front manual bench seat adjustment LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Front power seat adjustment Rear-facing child restraint installation using
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Armrests (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Rear-facing child restraint installation using
Head restraints (1st row only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Head restraints (2nd row – outboard
Forward-facing child restraint installation
positions only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Forward-facing child restraint installation
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
using the seat belts — front passenger and
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 rear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Forward-facing child restraint installation
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 using the seat belts — front bench center
Two-point type seat belt without retractor position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
(center of the front bench seat) Installing top tether strap (Rear bench seat) . . . . . . 1-43
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Precautions on supplemental restraint
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62

SEATS

● The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the pas-
senger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

ARS1152 FRONT MANUAL CAPTAIN’S CHAIR
SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
WARNING ● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
be upright. Always sit well back in the
the seatback is reclined. This can be
seat with both feet on the floor and
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-
be against your body. In an accident,
tions on seat belt usage” later in this
you could be thrown into it and receive
section.
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and ● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
receive serious internal injuries. to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0419 LRS0420 WRS0847
Forward and backward Reclining FRONT MANUAL BENCH SEAT
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
seat forward or backward to the desired position. back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever Forward and backward
Release the lever to lock the seat in position. up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position. Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the Release the lever to lock the seat in position.
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)
position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

LRS0427 LRS0633
Reclining FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT Forward and backward
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean (if so equipped) Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever the seat forward or backward to the desired
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
Operating tips position.
to lock the seatback in position. ● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
Reclining
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, Move the recline switch backward until the de-
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat then reactivate the switch. sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later ● Do not operate the power seat switch for a forward again, move the switch forward and
in this section). Also, the seatback can be re- long period of time when the engine is off. move your body forward. The seatback will move
clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve- This will discharge the battery. forward.
hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P
(Park). See “Automatic drive positioner” in “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” for automatic drive po-
sitioner operation.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).

LRS0634 LRS0635
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
seat) The lumbar support feature provides lower back
Push the front or rear end of the switch up or support to the driver. Move the lever up or down
down to adjust the angle and height of the seat to adjust the seat lumbar area.
cushion.


HEAD RESTRAINTS (1st row only)
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other ve-
hicle safety systems. They may provide
additional protection against injury in cer-
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head
restraints properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the head restraint stalks or
remove the head restraint. Do not use the
seat if the head restraint has been re-
WRS0368 LRS0425 moved. If the head restraint was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
Type A Type B
straint before an occupant uses the seat-
᭺
A Stowed position ing position. Failure to follow these in-
structions can reduce the effectiveness of
᭺
B Resting position
the head restraints. This may increase the
ARMRESTS (if so equipped) risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.
To use the armrests on the captain’s chairs (type
A, if so equipped), pull them down to the resting
position.
To use the center armrest on the bench seat (type
B, if so equipped), pull on the tab in the center of
the seat and fold it down to the resting position.


LRS2020 LRS0887 WRS0134
The illustration shows the seating positions Components Adjustment
equipped with head restraints. The first row head
restraints are adjustable. 1. Head restraint Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.
᭡ Indicates the seating position is equipped with 2. Adjustment notches
a head restraint. 3. Lock knob
4. Stalks


LRS0888 LRS0889 LRS0890
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push Removal
the head restraint down.
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-
justable head restraints.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seating
position.


Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as
described in this section.
HEAD RESTRAINTS (2nd row –
outboard positions only)
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other ve-
hicle safety systems. They may provide
additional protection against injury in cer-
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head
restraints properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
LRS0891 SPA1025 anything to the head restraint stalks or
Install Front-seat Active Head Restraints remove the head restraint. Do not use the
seat if the head restraint has been re-
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz- moved. If the head restraint was removed,
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is ing the force that the seatback receives from the reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
facing the correct direction. The stalk with occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement straint before an occupant uses the seat-
the adjustment notches ᭺ must be installed
1 of the head restraint helps support the occu- ing position. Failure to follow these in-
in the hole with the lock knob ᭺.2 pant’s head by reducing its backward movement structions can reduce the effectiveness of
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the and helping absorb some of the forces that may the head restraints. This may increase the
head restraint down. lead to whiplash-type injuries. risk of serious injury or death in a
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions collision.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position. at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original position.

LRS2020 LRS2073 LRS2074
The illustration shows the seating positions Components Removal
equipped with head restraints. The second row
head restraints are removable but not adjustable. 1. Head restraint Use the following procedure to remove the head
restraints.
᭡ Indicates the seating position is equipped with 2. Lock knob(s)
a head restraint. 1. Adjust the seat or seatback as necessary.
3. Stalks
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped 2. Push and hold the lock knob(s).
with a head restraint or adjustable headrest. 3. Pull the head restraint up until it is removed
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall the head restraint and properly ad-
just the seat or seatback before an occupant
uses the seating position.


FLEXIBLE SEATING ● If the head restraints are removed for
any reason, they should be securely
WARNING stored to prevent them from causing
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo injury to passengers or damage to the
area or on the rear seats when they are vehicle in case of sudden braking or an
in the fold-down position. In a collision, accident.
people riding in these areas without ● When returning the seatbacks to the
proper restraints are more likely to be upright position, be certain they are
seriously injured or killed. completely secured in the latched posi-
● Do not allow people to ride in any area tion. If they are not completely secured,
of your vehicle that is not equipped with passengers may be injured in an acci-
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone dent or sudden stop.
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a ● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-
LRS2075 seat belt properly. vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
Install ● Do not fold down the rear seats when place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
occupants are in the rear seat area or In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes any luggage is on the rear seats. cargo could cause personal injury.
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is
facing the correct direction. ● Head restraints should be adjusted
properly as they may provide significant
2. Push the head restraint down until it locks in protection against injury in an accident.
place. Always replace and adjust them prop-
erly if they have been removed for any
reason.


WARNING
● If you fold the front passenger’s seat-
back flat forward to carry longer ob-
jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-
cured and not near an air bag. In a
crash, an inflating air bag might force
that object toward a person. This could
cause severe injury or even death. Se-
cure objects away from the area in
which an air bag would inflate. See
“Precautions on supplemental restraint
system” later in this section.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
LRS0341 LRS0342 upright position, be certain they are
Folding the front passenger’s seatback ᭺
2 Lift up on the latch located on the upper completely secured in the latched posi-
flat (if so equipped) corner of the seatback to release the back of tion. If they are not completely secured,
the seat. This will enable you to fold the front passengers may be injured in an acci-
To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat for passenger seatback flat over the seat cush- dent or sudden stop.
extra storage length when transporting long ion.
items:
3. To return the front passenger’s seat to a
᭺
1 Slide the seat to the rear most position. Then seating position, lift up on the seatback and
lift up on the recline lever, located on the
push it up to an upright position. Then pull up
outside of the seat, and fold the seatback
on the recline lever and lean the seatback to
forward as far as it will go.
a proper seating position. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.


LRS0398 LRS0399 LRS0400
Folding the rear bench seat ᭺
2 Fold the bottom of the seat cushion toward ᭺
3 Repeat this process to raise and secure the
the back of the vehicle until it locks in place. seat cushion on the other side of the vehicle
To fold the rear bench seat up for storage capac- for maximum storage capacity.
ity behind the front seats or to remove the jacking
tools from the storage area: To return the rear bench seat to a seating posi-
tion, reverse the process. Make sure to prop-
᭺
1 Lift up on the lever, located on the side of the
erly push the seat cushion down into place.
seat, while lifting the front of the seat cushion
up.


WARNING WARNING
● When the vehicle is being used to carry Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
cargo, properly secure all cargo to help area or on the rear seat when it is in the
prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do fold-down position. Use of these areas by
not place cargo higher than the seat- passengers without proper restraints
backs. In a sudden stop or collision, could result in serious injury in an acci-
unsecured cargo could cause personal dent or sudden stop.
injury.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
seat belt properly. Never ride in the rear
seat unless the seat bottom cushions WRS0920
are in place and latched. Folding the rear bench seatback down
● When returning the seatbacks to the The rear bench seatback can be tilted forward to
upright position, be certain they are
access the child restraint anchor point locations.
completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured, To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap up ᭺
1
passengers may be injured in an acci- and tilt the seatback. The child restraint anchor
dent or sudden stop. points ᭺ can be accessed behind the rear
2
bench seatback.


SEAT BELTS

SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.


SSS0134 SSS0016

WARNING WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this ● The seat belt should be properly ad-
vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
times. Children should be properly re- reduce the effectiveness of the entire
strained in the rear seat and, if appro- restraint system and increase the
priate, in a child restraint. chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.


● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely ● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-
fastened to the proper buckle. vated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
See your NISSAN dealer.
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness. ● Removal and installation of preten-
sioner system components should be
● Do not allow more than one person to
done by a NISSAN dealer.
use the same seat belt.
● All seat belt assemblies, including re-
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
tractors and attaching hardware,
than there are seat belts.
should be inspected after any collision
● If the seat belt warning light glows con- by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
tinuously while the ignition is turned mends that all seat belt assemblies in
ON with all doors closed and all seat use during a collision be replaced un-
SSS0014 belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- less the collision was minor and the
function in the system. Have the system belts show no damage and continue to
WARNING checked by a NISSAN dealer. operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
● Always route the shoulder belt over ● No changes should be made to the seat not in use during a collision should also
your shoulder and across your chest. belt system. For example, do not modify be inspected and replaced if either
Never put the belt behind your back, the seat belt, add material, or install damage or improper operation is noted.
under your arm or across your neck. The devices that may change the seat belt ● All child restraints and attaching hard-
belt should be away from your face and routing or tension. Doing so may affect ware should be inspected after any col-
neck, but not falling off your shoulder. the operation of the seat belt system. lision. Always follow the restraint
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as Modifying or tampering with the seat manufacturer’s inspection instructions
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE belt system may result in serious per- and replacement recommendations.
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could sonal injury. The child restraints should be replaced
increase the risk of internal injuries in if they are damaged.
an accident.


PREGNANT WOMEN THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use WITH RETRACTOR
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible WARNING
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder ● Every person who drives or rides in this
belt over your shoulder and across your chest. vehicle should use a seat belt at all
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab- times.
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations. ● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
INJURED PERSONS dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
you could be thrown into it and receive
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
neck or other serious injuries. You
recommendations. LRS0419
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries. Manual front seat shown
● For the most effective protection when Fastening the seat belts
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should 1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
be upright. Always sit well back in the section.
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.


The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
WRS0137 WRS0138
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-
᭺
2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor ᭺
3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug straints” later in this section for more information.
and insert the tongue into the buckle until on the hips as shown.
you hear and feel the latch engage. The ALR mode should be used only for
᭺
4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the child restraint installation. During normal
● The retractor is designed to lock dur- retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
seat belt use by a passenger, the ALR mode
ing a sudden stop or on impact. A shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
should not be activated. If it is activated it
slow pulling motion permits the seat and across your chest.
belt to move, and allows you some may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
The front passenger seat and the rear seating sion. It can also change the operation of
freedom of movement in the seat.
positions three-point seat belts have two modes the front passenger air bag. See “Front
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from of operation: passenger air bag and status light” later in
its fully retracted position, firmly pull this section.
● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the re- ● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
tractor.


To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
WARNING
check the operation as follows:
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely se- ● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
cured in the latched position. If they are quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
not completely secured, passengers may strict further belt movement.
be injured in an accident or sudden stop. If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
᭺
1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.


WARNING
● After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the shoul-
der belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
tiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.

LRS0242 LRS0642
Front seats TWO-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front WITHOUT RETRACTOR (center of
outboard seats) the front bench seat) (if so equipped)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)
To adjust, pull out ᭺ the adjustment button and
1
move the shoulder belt anchor ᭺ to the desired
2
position, so the belt passes over the center of the
shoulder. The belt should be away from your face
and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re-
lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulder
belt anchor into position.


LRS0643 LRS0644 LRS0645
Fastening the seat belts ᭺
2 Tighten the belt by pulling the free end of the ᭺
3 Position the lap belt low and snug on the
belt away from the tongue. hips as illustrated.
᭺
1 Insert the tongue into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage.


WARNING
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.
● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
LRS0646 LRS0647 not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
᭺
4 Loosen the belt by holding the tongue at a Unfastening the seat belts den stop.
right angle to the belt, then pull on the belt.
᭺ To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
1
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
the buckle.
● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS mild soap solution or any solution recom-
If, because of body size or driving position, it is mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
the installed seat belts is available that can be seat belts to retract until they are completely
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in dry.
(200 mm) of length and may be used for either ● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
the driver or front passenger seating position. guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur- belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
chasing an extender if an extender is required. belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

CHILD SAFETY

● Periodically check to see that the seat Children need adults to help protect them.
WARNING
belt and the metal components, such as They need to be properly restrained.
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires Infants and children need special protec-
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, In addition to the general information in this tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the manual, child safety information is available from them properly. The shoulder belt may
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as- many other sources, including doctors, teachers, come too close to the face or neck. The
sembly should be replaced. government traffic safety offices, and community lap belt may not fit over their small hip
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
to learn the best way to transport your child. ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal
injury. Always use appropriate child
There are three basic types of child restraint
restraints.
systems:
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-
● Rear-facing child restraint tories require the use of approved child restraints
● Forward-facing child restraint for infants and small children. See “Child re-
straints” later in this section.
● Booster seat
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size. using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing belt. See the “Child restraints” section for more
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints information.
are available for children who outgrow rear-
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle Studies show that children are safer when
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer properly restrained in the rear seat than in
use a forward-facing child restraint. the front seat.


This is especially important because your restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
WARNING
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
tem (air bag system) for the front passen- and use. Never let a child stand or kneel on any
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” seat and do not allow a child in the cargo
later in this section. LARGER CHILDREN area. The child could be seriously injured
or killed in a sudden stop or collision.
Children who are too large for child restraints
INFANTS
should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5
mends that infants be placed in child restraints cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety obtain proper seat belt fit.
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-
commercially available booster seat if the shoul-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.
der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap
SMALL CHILDREN portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-
men. The booster seat should raise the child so
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing across the top, middle portion of the shoulder
child restraint as long as possible up to the height and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat
or weight limit of the child restraint. Forward- can only be used in seating positions that have a
facing child restraints are available for children three-point type seat belt. The booster seat
who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are
should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-
at least 1 year old. Refer to the manufacturer’s
fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom- Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
mends that small children be placed in child Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so
restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle and neck, use the shoulder belt without the
Safety Standards. You should choose a child booster seat.

CHILD RESTRAINTS

– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-
gest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see
ARS1098 WRS0256 “Forward-facing child restraint in-
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD stallation using the seat belts” later
WARNING in this section.
RESTRAINTS
● Failure to follow the warnings and in- – Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
structions for proper use and installa- Bag System, never install a rear-
tion of child restraints could result in facing child restraint in the front
serious injury or death of a child or seat. An inflating air bag could seri-
other passengers in a sudden stop or ously injure or kill a child. A rear-
collision: facing child restraint must only be
– The child restraint must be used and used in the rear seat.
installed properly. Always follow all – Be sure to purchase a child restraint
of the child restraint manufacturer’s that will fit the child and vehicle.
instructions for installation and use. Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.


– Child restraint anchor points are de- This vehicle is equipped with a universal child ● If the child restraint is compatible with your
signed to withstand loads from child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
restraints that are properly fitted. (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys- and check the various adjustments to be
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or sure the child restraint is compatible with
– Never use the anchor points for adult webbing-mounted attachments that can be con- your child. Choose a child restraint that is
seat belts or harnesses. nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH designed for your child’s height and weight.
– A child restraint with a top tether (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys- Always follow all recommended procedures.
strap should not be used in the front tem” later in this section. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
passenger seat. territories require that infants and small
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- children be restrained in an approved child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
sible after fitting the child restraint. restraint at all times while the vehicle is
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for being operated. Canadian law requires the
– Infants and children should always infants and children of various sizes. When se- top tether strap on forward-facing child
be placed in an appropriate child re- lecting any child restraint, keep the following restraints be secured to the designated an-
straint while in the vehicle. chor point on the vehicle.
points in mind:
● When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system ● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli- that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
sion, loose objects can injure occu- Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
pants or damage the vehicle. Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
CAUTION sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can and seat belt system.
become very hot. Check the seating sur-
face and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.


LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-
tions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious in-
jury or death of a child or other passen-
gers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
LRS0429 center rear seating position using LRS0748
the LATCH lower anchors. The child
LATCH system lower anchor locations LATCH lower anchor location
restraint will not be secured properly.
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers LATCH lower anchor location
– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
for CHildren) SYSTEM ing your fingers into the lower anchor The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors obstructions over the anchors such attached to the seatback to help you locate the
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion LATCH lower anchors.
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible
material. The child restraint will not
child restraints. This system may also be referred
be secured properly if the lower an-
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. chors are obstructed.
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle
seat belt to secure the child restraint.


LRS0395 LRS0661 LRS0662
LATCH lower anchor point locations LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH lower When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
anchor attachments those supplied with the child restraint.
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
structions provided by the child restraint manu-
facturer.


Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH
system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.

LRS0393 WRS0801

Top tether anchor point locations Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
Anchor points are located under the rear window ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
behind the rear bench seat. to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT erly attached to the lower anchors.
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraints” sections before
installing a child restraint.


WRS0802 LRS0673 LRS0674
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4
3. For child restraints that are equipped with 4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
additional slack from the anchor attach- to side while holding the child restraint near
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
in the center of the child restraint with your straint should not move more than 1 inch (25
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and seatback while tightening the webbing and check to see if the LATCH attachment
of the anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint or try installing by
using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).
Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-
hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
WARNING
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 The three-point seat belt with Automatic
through 4. Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.

WRS0256

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS


WRS0256 WRS0761 LRS0669
Rear-facing – step 1 Rear-facing – step 2 Rear-facing – step 3
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in- restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
stalling a child restraint. hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear structions for belt routing. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
seats: when the seat belt is fully retracted.

1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.


LRS0670 WRS0762 WRS0763
Rear-facing – step 4 Rear-facing – step 5 Rear-facing – step 6
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 5. Remove any additional slack from the seat 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. belt; press downward and rearward firmly in fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
the center of the child restraint to compress to side while holding the child restraint near
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while the seat belt path. The child restraint should
pulling up on the seat belt. not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.


7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
installing a child restraint. WRS0799 WRS0800
Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2 Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the 2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- 3. The back of the child restraint should be
LATCH system: ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check secured against the vehicle seatback.
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop- If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- erly attached to the lower anchors.
ways follow the child restraint manufactur- straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.
er’s instructions. If the child restraint is equipped with a top If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor head restraint when the child restraint
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this is removed. See “Head restraints” in this
section for head restraint adjustment infor-
section. Do not install child restraints that
mation.
require the use of a top tether strap in seat-
ing positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.


If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.

LRS0671 WRS0697
Forward-facing – step 4 Forward-facing – step 6
4. For child restraints that are equipped with 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
additional slack from the anchor attach- to side while holding the child restraint near
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
in the center of the child restraint with your straint should not move more than 1 inch (25
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and seatback while tightening the webbing and check to see if the LATCH attachment
of the anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any as necessary, or put the restraint in another
slack. seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.


7. Check to make sure the child restraint is the rear-facing direction and therefore
properly secured prior to each use. If the must not be used in the front seat.
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 6.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD er’s instructions.
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING The back of the child restraint should be
THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT secured against the vehicle seatback.
PASSENGER AND REAR BENCH If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
SEAT straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
WARNING secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the child restraint
The three-point seat belt with Automatic is removed. See “Head restraints” in this
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used WRS0699
section for head restraint adjustment, re-
when installing a child restraint. Failure to Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – moval and installation information.
use the ALR mode will result in the child step 1
restraint not being properly secured. The Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child If the seating position does not have an
restraint could tip over or be loose and adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or with the proper child restraint fit, try another
installing a child restraint.
collision. Also, it can change the opera- seating position or a different child restraint.
tion of the front passenger air bag. See Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
“Front passenger air bag and status light” child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
later in this section. rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in


WRS0680 LRS0667 LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 3 Forward-facing – step 4 Forward-facing – step 5
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
structions for belt routing. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). See “In-
stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do
not install child restraints that require the use
of a top tether strap in seating positions that
do not have a top tether anchor.


through 8.

WRS0681 WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 6 Forward-facing – step 8
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat 8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
the center of the child restraint with your to side while holding the child restraint near
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion the seat belt path. The child restraint should
and seatback while pulling up on the seat not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
belt. side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten
slack. the seat belt as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again. You
may need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.


● NISSAN recommends that child re-
straints be installed in the rear seat.
However, if you must install a forward
facing child restraint in the front center
bench seat, follow these instructions
carefully.
● A child restraint with a top tether strap
should not be used in the front passen-
ger seat.

LRS0865 WRS0256
Forward-facing – step 10 FORWARD-FACING CHILD
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
the ON position. The front passenger air bag THE SEAT BELTS — FRONT BENCH
status light should illuminate. If this CENTER POSITION
light is not illuminated see ЉFront passenger
air bag and status lightЉ in this section. WARNING
Move the child restraint to another
● Never install a rear-facing child re-
seating position. Have the system
straint in the front passenger seat.
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Front air bags inflate with great force. A
After the child restraint is removed and the seat rear-facing child restraint could be
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re- struck by the front air bag in a crash and
straint mode) is canceled. could seriously injure or kill your child.


er’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seat back. If
necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.
See “Head restraints” earlier in this section.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to install the head
restraint when the child restraint is removed.
with the proper child restraint fit, try another
WRS0914 WRS0915
seating position or a different child restraint.
Foward-Facing — step 1 Forward-Facing — step 3
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
Safety” and “Child Restraints” sections before restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
installing a child restraint. hear and feel the latch engage.
Follow these steps to install a child restraint in the Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-
front center bench seat: facturer’s instructions for seat belt routing.

1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.


through 5.

WRS0916 WRS0917
Forward-Facing — step 4 Forward-Facing — step 5
4. Remove any additional slack from the seat 5. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
belt. Press downward and rearward firmly in fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
the center of the child restraint with your to side while holding the child restraint near
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion the seat belt path. The child restraint should
and seatback while pulling up on the seat not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
belt. side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the seat belt holds the restraint in
place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten
the seat belt as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again. You
may need to try a different child restraint. Not
all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.


2. Position the top tether strap over the top of
the seatback and under the head restraint.
3. Secure the tether strap ᭺ to the tether
2
anchor point ᭺ on the seat directly behind
3
the child restraint.
4. Return the seatback to the locked position.
5. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-
stallation procedure steps in this section
before tightening the tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
LRS0392 WRS0423
dealer for details.
Anchor point access Rear bench seat BOOSTER SEATS
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP Before securing the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seating po- Precautions on booster seats
(Rear bench seat)
sitions only) or the seat belt, as applicable, follow
To access the anchor points ᭺ behind the rear
2
these steps. WARNING
bench seat, tilt the rear seatback forward by If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
lifting up on the pull strap ᭺ behind the seat-
1 1. If necessary, raise or remove the head re-
properly, the risk of a child being injured
back. straint to position the top tether strap ᭺ 1
in a sudden stop or collision greatly
over the top of the seatback. If the head
increases:
restraint is removed, store it in a secure
place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint – Make sure the shoulder portion of
when the child restraint is removed. See the belt is away from the child’s face
“Head restraints” in this section for and neck and the lap portion of the
head restraint adjustment, removal belt does not cross the stomach.
and installation information.


– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.

LRS0455 LRS0453


● Make sure the child’s head will be properly Booster seat installation on front
supported by the booster seat or vehicle passenger seat and rear seat
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a CAUTION
low back booster seat ᭺ is chosen, the
1
vehicle seatback must be at or above the Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is Automatic Locking Retractor mode when
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a using a booster seat with the seat belts.
high back booster seat ᭺ should be used.
2 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
● If the booster seat is compatible with your Safety”, “Child Restraints” and “Booster Seats”
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat sections before installing a child restraint.
and check the various adjustments to be Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
sure the booster seat is compatible with the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
LRS0464 child. Always follow all recommended pro-
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by cedures.
several manufacturers. When selecting any All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
booster seat, keep the following points in mind: territories require that infants and small
● Choose only a booster seat with a label children be restrained in an approved child
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor restraint at all times while the vehicle is
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian being operated.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The instructions in this section apply to booster
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be seat installation in the rear seats or the front
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat passenger seat.
and seat belt system.


with the proper booster seat fit, try another
seating position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
WRS0699 LRS0454 manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
1. If you must install a booster seat in the Front passenger position seat belt routing.
front seat, move the seat to the rear- 3. The booster seat should be positioned on 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
most position. the vehicle seat so that it is stable. tions for properly fastening a seat belt
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only If necessary, adjust or remove the head re- shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
place it in a front-facing direction. Always straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If retractor” earlier in this section.
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- the head restraint is removed, store it in a
structions. secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. See “Head restraints” in this sec-
tion for head restraint adjustment, removal
and installation information.


SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
RESTRAINT SYSTEM rollover supplemental air bag system: This
system can help cushion the impact force to the
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec- head of occupants in front and rear outboard
tion contains important information concerning seating positions in certain side impact or rollover
the following systems: collisions. In a side impact, the curtain and roll-
over air bags are designed to inflate on the side
● Driver and passenger supplemental front-
where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, both
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
curtain and rollover air bags are designed to
System)
inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
mental air bag
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll- vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute
over supplemental air bag for them. Seat belts should always be correctly
LRS0865 worn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front ● Seat belt with pretensioner
tance away from the steering wheel, instrument
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in Supplemental front-impact air bag system: panel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier
the ON position. The front passenger air bag The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help in this section for instructions and precautions on
status light may or may not illuminate, cushion the impact force to the head and chest of seat belt usage.
depending on the size of the child and the the driver and right front passenger in certain
The supplemental air bags operate only
type of booster seat being used. See “Front frontal collisions.
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
passenger air bag and status light” later in START position.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
this section.
mental air bag system: This system can help
After turning the ignition key to the ON
cushion the impact force to the chest area of the
position, the supplemental air bag warning
driver and right front passenger in certain side
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
impact collisions. The side air bag is designed to
warning light will turn off after about 7
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
seconds if the system is operational.


● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags as
needed. Failure to properly wear seat
belts can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some
WRS0031 conditions. This sensor is only used in
this seat. Failure to be properly seated
WARNING ● The seat belts and the front air bags are and wearing the seat belt can increase
most effective when you are sitting well the risk or severity of injury in an acci-
● The front air bags ordinarily will not
back and upright in the seat. The front dent. See “Front Passenger air bag and
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
air bags inflate with great force. Even status light” later in this section.
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tal collision. Always wear your seat ● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning
belts to help reduce the risk or severity ing wheel. Placing them inside the
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
of injury in various kinds of accidents. steering wheel rim could increase the
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of
risk that they are injured when the front
● The front passenger air bag will not injury or death in a crash. You may also
air bag inflates.
inflate if the passenger air bag status receive serious or fatal injuries from the
light is lit or if the front passenger seat front air bag if you are up against it
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air when it inflates. Always sit back against
bag and status light” later in this the seatback and as far away as practi-
section. cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.


ARS1133 ARS1041

WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.


ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain and rollover air bags
inflate if they are not properly re-
strained. Pre-teens and children should
be properly restrained in the rear seat, if
possible.


ARS1045 WRS0256 WRS0431
Do not lean against doors or windows.
WARNING
WARNING
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
child restraint in the front seat. An in- mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
flating front air bag could seriously inside-impact and rollover supplemental air
jure or kill your child. See “Child re- bags:
straints” earlier in this section for
● The side air bags and curtain and roll-
details.
over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in
the event of a frontal impact, rear im-
pact, or lower severity side collision.
Always wear your seat belts to help
reduce the risk or severity of injury in
various kinds of accidents.


WARNING
● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain and rollover air bags are most
effective when you are sitting well back
and upright in the seat. The side air bag
and curtain and rollover air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
LRS0396 SSS0162 lean against the door. Some examples
Do not lean against doors or windows. Do not lean against doors or windows. of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations.


LRS0421 SSS0159

WARNING
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.


rollover supplemental air bag
rollover supplemental air bags inflators
3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
4. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-
ules
5. Crash zone sensor
6. Occupant classification system control
unit
7. Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor)
8. Seat belt buckle switches
9. Seat belt with pretensioner
10. Satellite sensors
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and right
front passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
all of the information, cautions and warn-
ings in this manual still apply and must be
LRS2093 followed.


The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
located in the center of the steering wheel. The bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but senger seated upright as far as practical away
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. the air bag will be off). See “Front passenger air from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
The supplemental front air bags are designed to bag and status light” later in this section for front air bags inflate quickly in order to help
inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, al- further details. One front air bag inflating does not protect the front occupants. Because of this, the
though they may inflate if the forces in another indicate improper performance of the system. force of the front air bag inflating can increase the
type of collision are similar to those of a higher risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
If you have any questions about your air bag
severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in against, the front air bag module during inflation.
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack dealer. If you are considering modification of your The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
of it) is not always an indication of proper front air vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
The front air bags operate only when the
bag system operation. NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-
beginning of this Owner’s Manual.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual tion.
stage inflators. It also monitors information from When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
After turning the ignition key to the ON
the crash zone sensor, the Air Bag Control Unit may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
position, the supplemental air bag warning
(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas- This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
sification sensor (pressure sensor) and right front fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
warning light will turn off after about 7
passenger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator op- cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
seconds if the system is operational.
eration is based on the severity of a collision and of a breathing condition should get fresh air
seat belt usage for the driver. For the right front promptly.
passenger, it additionally monitors the weight of Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
an occupant or object on the seat and seat belt help to cushion the impact force on the face and
tension. Based on information from the sensors, chest of the driver and right front passenger. They
only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.
depending on the crash severity and whether the However, an inflating front air bag may cause
front occupants are belted or unbelted. Addition- facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags
ally, the right front passenger air bag may be do not provide restraint to the lower body.
automatically turned OFF under some conditions,
depending on the weight detected on the pas-
senger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the

Status light passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
The right front passenger air bag status
vehicle are not part of this system.
light is located under the climate controls.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ЉONЉ The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
position, the front passenger air bag status light the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
seconds and then turns off or operates depend- as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
ing on the front passenger seat occupied status. matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used
The light operates as follows: to meet the requirements.

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The is One sensor used is the occupant classification
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the
and will not inflate in a crash. right front passenger seat cushion and is de-
signed to detect an occupant and objects on the
LRS0865 ● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult, right front seat by weight. It works together with
Front passenger air bag and status light child or child restraint as outlined in this seat belt sensors described later. For example, if
section: The illuminates to indicate a child is in the right front passenger seat, the
WARNING that the front passenger air bag is OFF and Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the
The front passenger air bag is designed to will not inflate in a crash. passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the
automatically turn OFF under some con- ● Occupied passenger seat and the passen- regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type
ditions. Read this section carefully to ger meets the conditions outlined in this specified in the regulations is on the seat, its
learn how it operates. Proper use of the weight and the child’s weight can be detected
section: The light is OFF to indicate
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec- and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant
that the front passenger air bag is opera-
essary for most effective protection. Fail- classification sensor operation can vary depend-
tional.
ure to follow all instructions in this ing on the right front passenger seat belt sensors.
manual concerning the use of seats, seat Front passenger air bag
The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-
belts and child restraints can increase the The right front passenger air bag is designed to signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the
risk or severity of injury in an accident. automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is oper- amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when
ated under some conditions as described below it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front mode (child restraint mode). Based on the

weight on the seat detected by the occupant child restraints as required by the regulations. If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
classification sensor and the belt tension de- Failing to properly secure child restraints and to the passenger air bag status light may or may not
tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air Bag use the ALR mode (child restraint mode) may be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
System determines whether the front passenger allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
air bag should be automatically turned OFF, as sudden stop. This can also result in the passen- bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that
required by the regulations. ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
for proper use and installation. used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
lined in this manual should not cause the passen- If the right front passenger seat is not occupied and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
small adults it may be turned OFF; however, if the a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush- seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting the object’s weight detected by the occupant If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out classification sensor. Other conditions could also minate even though you believe that the child
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant standing on the seat, or if two children are on the properly positioned, the system may be sensing
improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
(child restraint mode), this could cause the air OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
bag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
are seated and restrained properly.
seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the until you have confirmed with your dealer that
most effective protection by the seat belt and Using the passenger air bag status light, you can your air bag is working properly, reposition the
supplemental air bag. monitor when the front passenger air bag is au- occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil- The air bag system and passenger air bag status
The light will not illuminate when the right front
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat. light will take a few seconds to register a change
passenger seat is unoccupied.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child in the passenger seat status. For example, if a
restraints and booster seats be properly installed If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen- large adult who is sitting in the front passenger
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag
classification sensor and seat belt sensors are that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the status light will go from OFF to ON for a few
designed to operate as described above to turn person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system
the front passenger air bag OFF for specified properly or not using the seat belt properly. operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air ● Do not make unauthorized changes to ● No unauthorized changes should be
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- made to any components or wiring of
light , located in the meter and gauges area pension system or front end structure. the seat belt system. This may affect the
on the driver’s side of the instrument panel, will This could affect proper operation of front air bag system. Tampering with
blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN the front air bag system. the seat belt system may result in seri-
dealer. ous personal injury.
● Tampering with the front air bag system
Other supplemental front-impact air bag may result in serious personal injury. ● Work on and around the front air bag
precautions Tampering includes changes to the system should be done by a NISSAN
steering wheel and the instrument dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
WARNING panel assembly by placing material ment should also be done by a NISSAN
over the steering wheel pad and above dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
● Do not place any objects on the steer- the instrument panel or by installing System (SRS) wiring should not be
ing wheel pad or on the instrument additional trim material around the air modified or disconnected. Unauthor-
panel. Also, do not place any objects bag system. ized electrical test equipment and prob-
between any occupant and the steering ing devices should not be used on the
wheel or instrument panel. Such ob- ● Modifying or tampering with the front
air bag system.
jects may become dangerous projec- passenger seat may result in serious
tiles and cause injury if the front air personal injury. For example, do not ● A cracked windshield should be re-
bags inflate. change the front seats by placing mate- placed immediately by a qualified re-
rial on the seat cushion or by installing pair facility. A cracked windshield could
● Immediately after inflation, several additional trim material, such as seat affect the function of the supplemental
front air bag system components will be covers, on the seat that are not specifi- air bag system.
hot. Do not touch them; you may se- cally designed to assure proper air bag
verely burn yourself. operation. Additionally, do not stow any *The SRS wiring harness connectors are
objects under the front passenger seat yellow and orange for easy identification.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of or the seat cushion and seatback. Such When selling your vehicle, we request that you
the supplemental air bag system. This is objects may interfere with the proper inform the buyer about the front air bag system
to prevent accidental inflation of the operation of the occupant classifica- and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
supplemental air bag or damage to the tion sensor (pressure sensor). in this Owner’s Manual.
supplemental air bag system.


collisions, although they may inflate if the forces sions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain
in another type of collision are similar to those of and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to
a higher severity side impact. They are designed the lower body.
to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
pacted. They may not inflate in certain side colli-
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
sions.
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to passengers should be seated as far away as
inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near practical from the door finishers and side roof
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover air
(for example, during severe off roading) may bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the
cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate. occupants. Because of this, the force of the side
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflating
indication of proper side air bag and curtain and can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is
LRS2094 rollover air bag operation. too close to, or is against, these air bag modules
Front seat-mounted side-impact during inflation. The side air bag will deflate
When the side air bags and curtain and rollover quickly after the collision is over.
supplemental air bag and roof- air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
mounted curtain side-impact and followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not The curtain and rollover air bags will remain in-
harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should flated for a short time.
rollover supplemental air bag systems be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing The side air bags and curtain and rollover
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
condition should get fresh air promptly. air bags operate only when the ignition
seatback of the front seats. The curtain and roll-
switch is in the ON or START position.
over air bags are located in the side roof rails. Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
These systems are designed to meet voluntary help to cushion the impact force on the chest of After placing the ignition switch in the ON
guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to the front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bags position, the supplemental air bag warning
out-of-position occupants. However, all of the help to cushion the impact force to the head of light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
information, cautions and warnings in this occupants in the front and rear outboard seating warning light will turn off after about 7
manual still apply and must be followed. positions. They can help save lives and reduce seconds if the system is operational.
The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag
are designed to inflate in higher severity side or curtain and rollover air bag may cause abra-

WARNING ● Tampering with the side air bag system Seat belts with pretensioners (Front
● Do not place any objects near the seat-
may result in serious personal injury. seats)
For example, do not change the front
back of the front seats. Also, do not
seats by placing material near the seat- WARNING
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
backs or by installing additional trim
etc.) between the front door finisher
material, such as seat covers, around ● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-
and the front seat. Such objects may ter activation. They must be replaced
the side air bag.
become dangerous projectiles and together with the retractor and buckle
cause injury if a side air bag inflates. ● Work around and on the side air bag as a unit.
and curtain and rollover air bag systems
● Right after inflation, several side air bag ● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
should be done by a NISSAN dealer.
and curtain and rollover air bag system collision but a pretensioner is not acti-
Installation of electrical equipment
components will be hot. Do not touch vated, be sure to have the pretensioner
should also be done by a NISSAN
them; you may severely burn yourself. system checked and, if necessary, re-
dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*
● No unauthorized changes should be should not be modified or discon- placed by your NISSAN dealer.
made to any components or wiring of nected. Unauthorized electrical test ● No unauthorized changes should be
the side air bag and curtain and rollover equipment and probing devices should made to any components or wiring of
air bag systems. This is to prevent dam- not be used on the side air bag or cur- the pretensioner system. This is to pre-
age to or accidental inflation of the side tain and rollover air bag systems. vent damage to or accidental activation
air bag and curtain and rollover air bag of the pretensioners. Tampering with
systems. * The SRS wiring harness or connectors are the pretensioner system may result in
yellow or orange for easy identification. serious personal injury.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- When selling your vehicle, we request that you ● Work around and on the pretensioner
pension system or side panel. This inform the buyer about the side air bag and system should be done by a NISSAN
could affect proper operation of the curtain and rollover air bag systems and guide the dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
curtain and rollover air bag systems. buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s ment should also be done by a NISSAN
Manual. dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.


● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner When selling your vehicle, we request that you
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
could cause personal injury. in this Owner’s Manual.

Working with the seat belt retractor, the preten-
sioner helps tighten the seat belt when the ve-
hicle becomes involved in certain types of colli-
sions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way
as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This WRS0885
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. 1. SRS Air bag warning labels
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history The warning labels are located on the sur-
of a breathing condition should get fresh air face of the sun visor.
promptly.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow WARNING LABELS
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest. Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
The supplemental air bag warning light is shown in the illustration.
used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner
system. (See ЉSUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHTЉ in this section for more de-
tails.) If the operation of the supplemental air bag
warning light indicates there is a malfunction,
have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● The supplemental air bag warning light re- after inflation has occurred. Repair and replace-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds. ment of these supplemental air bag systems
should be done only by a NISSAN dealer.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently. When maintenance work is required on the ve-
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain and
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
rollover air bags, pretensioners and related parts
not come on at all.
should be pointed out to the person performing
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air the maintenance. The ignition key should always
bag and curtain and rollover air bag or preten- be in the LOCK position when working under the
sioner systems may not operate properly. They hood or inside the vehicle.
must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle
to the nearest NISSAN dealer. WARNING
● Once a front air bag, side air bag or
LRS0100 WARNING curtain and rollover air bag has inflated,
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG If the supplemental air bag warning light the air bag module will not function
WARNING LIGHT is on, it could mean that the front air bag, again and must be replaced. Addition-
side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag ally, the activated pretensioners must
The supplemental air bag warning light, and/or pretensioner systems will not op- also be replaced. The air bag module
displaying in the instrument panel, moni- erate in an accident. To help avoid injury and pretensioners should be replaced
tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten- to yourself or others, have your vehicle by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module
sioners and all related wiring. checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as and pretensioner cannot be repaired.
possible. ● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
When the ignition key is in the ON or START
and rollover air bag systems and the
position, the supplemental air bag warning light Repair and replacement procedure pretensioner system should be in-
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and spected by a NISSAN dealer if there is
off. This means the system is operational. any damage to the front end or side
rollover supplemental air bags and pretensioners
If any of the following conditions occur, the front are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. portion of the vehicle.
air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supple-
and pretensioner systems need servicing: mental air bag warning light remains illuminated

● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-
tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap the
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Cor-
rect supplemental air bag and preten-
sioner system disposal procedures are
set forth in the appropriate NISSAN
Service Manual. Incorrect disposal pro-
cedures could cause personal injury.


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Engine oil pressure gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-7 Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-32
Voltmeter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Automatic transmission fluid temperature Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Cargo lamp switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-13 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Vehicle Information Display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-37
How to use the Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . 2-21 Tow mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Vehicle security system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system Instrument panel storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Center armrest storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Sunglasses holder (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Personal lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Seatback pocket (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Map lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Overhead console (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 HomeLinkா universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-56
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Programming HomeLinkா. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Grocery hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Programming HomeLinkா for Canadian
Lockable bedside storage compartment customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Operating the HomeLinkா universal
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Power windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Manual windows (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Rear sliding window (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button . . . . . . 2-58
Rear power window switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . 2-51
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Vents (P. 4-13)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-29)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio
control/Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone
System (if so equipped) (P. 4-54,
P. 4-71)
4. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-32)
5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-47, P. 2-34)
6. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator
lights (P. 2-4, 2-13)
7. Cruise control main/set switches
8. Shift selector (column) (if so equipped)
(P. 5-16)
9. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)
10. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2)
11. Navigation system* controls
12. Audio system controls (P. 4-30)
13. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-47)
14. Glove box (P. 2-42)
15. Climate controls (P. 4-14, P. 4-21,
WIC1563 P. 4-28)

2-2 Instruments and controls

16. Aux jack (if so equipped) (P. 4-52) 32. Pedal position adjustment switch
17. Power outlet (P. 2-38) (if so equipped) (P. 3-14)
18. Heated seat switch (if so equipped) 33. Rear power window switch
(P. 2-35) (if so equipped) (P. 2-51)
19. Cup holder (P. 2-45) *: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off er’s Manual (if so equipped).
switch (P. 2-36)
21. Tow mode switch (P. 2-38) theses for operating details.
22. Electronic locking rear differential
(E-Lock) system switch
(if so equipped) (P.2-36)
23. Shift selector (console)
24. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)
25. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-56)
26. Power outlet (P. 2-38)
27. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)
(P. 5-27)
28. Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-27)
29. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-14)
30. Cargo lamp switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-34)
31. Rear sonar system off switch

Instruments and controls 2-3

METERS AND GAUGES

WIC1243
1. Warning/indicator lights 7. Automatic transmission fluid tempera-
2. Tachometer ture gauge (if so equipped)
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge 8. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Vehicle
4. Voltmeter (if so equipped) Information Display
5. Fuel gauge 9. Engine oil pressure gauge
6. Speedometer (if so equipped)

WIC1244 WIC1245
1. Speedometer The twin trip odometer records the distance of Changing the display:
2. Odometer/twin trip display individual trips.
Pushing the change button changes the display
3. Change button as follows:
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Trip → Trip → Odometer only
Speedometer Elapsed time , driving distance and average
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. speed information is also available for vehicles
with a navigation system. Refer to “Control panel
Odometer/Twin trip odometer buttons” in the “Display screen, heater, air condi-
tioner, audio and phone systems”.
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON Resetting the trip odometer:
position.
Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-
The odometer records the total distance the ve- ond resets the currently displayed trip odometer
hicle has been driven. to zero.

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section for immediate
action required.

WIC1246 LIC1135
TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- GAUGE
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
into the red zone ᭺.
1
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range ᭺ when the gauge needle points
1
CAUTION within the zone shown in the illustration.
When engine speed approaches the red
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-
gine speed. Operating the engine in the outside air temperature and driving conditions.
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.


The indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
After a few driving trips. the light
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the ve-
hicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.
● For additional information, see “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in
LIC1199 this section. LIC1198

FUEL GAUGE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (if
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
so equipped)
in the tank. The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-
tem oil pressure while the engine is running. The
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
needle should be in the middle of the gauge when
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. the engine is running.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition key is turned to OFF.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters E (Empty).


CAUTION
● This gauge is not designed to indicate
low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.)
● If the gauge needle does not move with
the proper amount of engine oil, have
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer. Continued vehicle operation in
such a condition could cause serious
damage to the engine.
LIC1136 WIC1247
VOLTMETER (if so equipped) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON TEMPERATURE GAUGE (if so
position, the voltmeter indicates the battery volt- equipped)
age. When the engine is running, it indicates the
generator voltage. This gauge indicates the temperature of the au-
tomatic transmission fluid. The automatic trans-
While cranking the engine, the volts drop below mission fluid temperature is in the normal range
the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal
range (11 - 15 volts) ᭺ while the engine is
1
᭺ when the gauge needle points within the zone
1
shown in the illustration.
running, it may indicate that the charging system
is not functioning properly. Have the system


COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in- For information about the automatic anti-glare
CAUTION
dicates the heading direction of the vehicle. feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview
● This gauge is not designed to indicate mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-
low automatic transmission fluid level. With the ignition switch in the ON position, press ments” section.
Use the dipstick to check the fluid level. the or button as described in the
(See “5-speed automatic transmission charts below to activate various features of the
fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it- automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.
yourself” section.) Type A
● If the gauge indicates automatic trans- Push and hold Feature:
mission fluid temperature over the nor- (Push button again for about 1 sec-
the
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as button for about: ond to change settings)
safely possible. Have the vehicle
1 second Compass display toggles on/off
checked by a NISSAN dealer. Contin-
Automatic anti-glare/indicator light
ued operation of the vehicle may seri- 8 seconds
toggles on/off
ously damage the transmission.
Compass zone can be changed to
11 seconds
correct false compass readings
13 seconds Compass enters calibration mode
Type B
Push and hold Feature:
the (Push button again for about 1 sec-
button for about: ond to change settings)
1 second Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed to
8 seconds
correct false compass readings
10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode


WIC0904 LIC0583
Type A Type B
COMPASS DISPLAY If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
Push the or button for about 1 sec- less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
ond when the ignition switch is placed in the ON You can also calibrate the compass by driving
position to toggle the compass direction display your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-
᭺ on or off. The display will indicate the direction
1 pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
that the vehicle is heading. complete circles.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West


Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geo-
graphical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Press and hold the button for about
11 seconds or the button for about 8
seconds. The current zone number will ap-
pear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the or the button repeat-
edly to toggle through the zone numbers
until the desired number appears in the dis-
play. Once you have selected a zone num-
ber, the display will show a compass direc-
tion within a few seconds.

NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
Inaccurate compass direction
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
WIC0355
shown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the button for about 13 seconds or
the for about 10 seconds. The “C” or
“CAL” icon in the compass display will illu-
minate.
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.

CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the op-
eration of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.


WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Low fuel warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)
warning light

Automatic transmission check warning light Low tire pressure warning light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Automatic transmission park warning light Master warning light (if so equipped) Security indicator light (if so equipped)
( model)

or Brake warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Slip indicator light

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
temperature high warning light system on indicator light (if so equipped) light

4WD warning light ( model) Front passenger air bag status light

CHECKING BULBS The following lights come on briefly and then go WARNING LIGHTS
off:
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake For additional information on warnings and indi-
and place the ignition switch in the ON position cators, see “Vehicle information display” later in
without starting the engine. The following lights or , , , , this section.
will come on: If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
, or , , , , electrical system. Have the system repaired
promptly.


while the shift selector is in the P (Park) position,
or Anti-lock Braking Automatic transmission park
the transmission will disengage and the drive
System (ABS) warning light ( model) wheels will not lock.
warning light or Brake warning light
WARNING
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON ● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that This light functions for both the parking brake and
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) the automatic transmission P (Park) po- the foot brake systems.
warning light illuminates and then turns off. This sition will not function and the transfer
indicates the ABS is operational. case is in neutral. Parking brake indicator
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the ● When parking, always make sure that When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates position, the light comes on when the parking
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the and the parking brake is set. Failure to brake is applied.
system checked by a NISSAN dealer. engage the transfer position in 2WD, 4H
or 4LO could result in the vehicle mov- Low brake fluid warning light
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func- ing unexpectedly, resulting in serious When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates personal injury or property damage. position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See
“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” sec- ● Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H If the light comes on while the engine is running
or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-
tion.
warning light when the shift selector to hicle and perform the following:
Automatic Transmission check the P position and the ATP warning light
is ON. (Before shifting the 4WD switch 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
warning light into the 4LO position, move the shift as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-
selector to the N position once, shift the tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON manual.
shift selector into P again and make
position, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.
sure the ATP warning light is OFF.) 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
If the light comes on at any other time, it may
indicate the automatic transmission system is not This light indicates that the automatic transmis- warning system checked by a NISSAN
functioning properly. Have the system checked sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans- dealer.
by a NISSAN dealer. fer control is not secured in any drive position


ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock Braking If the light flickers or comes on during normal
WARNING
System (ABS) warning light” in this section.) driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the
● Your brake system may not be working engine and allow it to cool. If the light remains on
properly if the warning light is on. Driv- Charge warning light after checking the oil and coolant, stop the en-
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it gine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest If this light comes on while the engine is running, other authorized repair shop.
service station for repairs. Otherwise, it may indicate the charging system is not func-
have your vehicle towed because driv- tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check This light is not designed to indicate a low
ing it could be dangerous. the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, oil or low coolant level. Check the oil level
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN with the dipstick and check the coolant level on
● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid dealer immediately. the reservoir. See “Engine oil” and “Checking
level may increase your stopping dis- engine coolant level” in the “Maintenance and
tance and braking will require greater CAUTION do-it-yourself” section of this manual. Also see “If
pedal effort as well as pedal travel. your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-
● Do not ground electrical accessories
gency” section of this manual.
● If the brake fluid level is below the directly to the battery terminal. Doing
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake so will bypass the variable control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not CAUTION
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a charge completely. Refer to “Variable ● Running the engine with the engine oil
NISSAN dealer. voltage control system” in the “Mainte- pressure warning light on could cause
nance and do-it-yourself” section later serious damage to the engine almost
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning in this manual. immediately. Such damage is not cov-
indicator ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as
● Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing. soon as it is safe to do so.
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System Engine oil pressure low/
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the Engine coolant temperature
ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake high warning light
system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a
NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv- This light warns of low engine oil pressure or high
engine coolant temperature.

● If the gauge indicates engine coolant ● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
temperature over the normal range, in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
stop the vehicle as soon as safely pos- warning light turns on when you are functioning properly.
sible. If the engine is overheated, con- driving on dry hard surface roads: After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
tinued operation of the vehicle may se- position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift
riously damage the engine. See “If your and turns off.
switch to 2WD.
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section for immediate ac- – in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle, Low tire pressure warning:
tion required. move the shift selector to the N posi-
tion with the brake pedal depressed, If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
4WD warning light ( and shift the 4WD shift switch to pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
2WD. A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also
model) appears in the vehicle information display.
● If the warning light is still on after the If you select the tire pressure information
The 4WD warning light comes on when the key above operation, have your vehicle in the display (if so equipped), the LOW
switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
PRESSURE warning message will be dis-
engine is started. possible.
played. The tire pressure for each tire will
If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly, Low fuel warning light also be displayed.
the warning light will either remain illuminated or When the low tire pressure warning light
blink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Starting This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
and driving” section. tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve- tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-
nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E mended COLD tire pressure shown on the
CAUTION (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel
Tire and Loading Information label located
in the tank when the fuel gauge needle
● If the warning light comes on or blinks in the driver’s door opening. The low tire
reaches E (Empty).
during operation, have your vehicle pressure warning light does not automati-
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as Low tire pressure warning light cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-
possible. justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure ommended pressure, the vehicle must be
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
pressure of all tires except the spare. to activate the TPMS and turn off the low

tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres- ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
WARNING
sure gauge to check the tire pressure. is replaced, tire pressure will not be
● If the light does not illuminate with the
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is active indicated, the TPMS will not function
ignition switch in the ON position, have
as long as the low tire pressure warning light and the low tire pressure warning light
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
remains illuminated. will flash for approximately 1 minute.
as soon as possible.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
For additional information, see “Vehicle informa- ● If the light illuminates while driving, Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
tion display” in the “Instruments and controls” avoid sudden steering maneuvers or possible for tire replacement and/or
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, system resetting.
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and pull off the road to a safe location and
● Replacing tires with those not originally
in the “In case of emergency” section. stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
specified by NISSAN could affect the
Driving with under-inflated tires may
TPMS malfunction: proper operation of the TPMS.
permanently damage the tires and in-
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
rious vehicle damage could occur and CAUTION
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is may lead to an accident and could re- ● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on sult in serious personal injury. Check regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust check the tire pressure regularly.
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
the tire pressure to the recommended
NISSAN dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire ● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
warning does not appear if the low tire pressure and Loading Information label located of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal- in the driver’s door opening to turn the TPMS may not operate correctly.
function. low tire pressure warning light OFF. If ● Be sure to install the specified size of
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure the light still comes on while driving tires to the 4 wheels correctly.
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main- may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section in this place it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
manual.


Master warning light (if so The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened restraint system (air bag system) and/or the seat
equipped) when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For belts with pretensioner system may not function
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in properly. For additional details see “Supplemen-
This light comes on when various vehicle infor-
the ON position, the system does not activate the tal restraint system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
mation display warnings appear.
warning light for the front passenger. belts and supplemental restraint system” section
● No key warning of this manual.
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
● Low fuel warning belts and supplemental restraint system” section
for precautions on seat belt usage. WARNING
● Low windshield-washer fluid warning
Supplemental air bag warning If the supplemental air bag warning light
● Parking brake release warning is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
● Door open warning
light side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or and/or pretensioner systems will not op-
● Loose fuel cap warning erate in an accident. To help avoid injury
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
● Check tire pressure warning ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then to yourself or others, have your vehicle
turns off. This means the system is operational. checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
Seat belt warning light and possible.
chime If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag, INDICATOR LIGHTS
The light and chime remind you to fasten your and pretensioner systems need servicing and For additional information on warnings and indi-
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer: cators, see “Vehicle information display” later in
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START ● The supplemental air bag warning light re- this section.
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime Electronic locking rear
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s ● The supplemental air bag warning light differential (E-Lock) system on
seat belt is securely fastened. flashes intermittently.
indicator light (if so equipped)
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all. This light comes on when the electronic locking
rear differential (E-Lock) system clutch is fully
engaged.

The indicator light flashes when the system is first The high beam indicator light also comes on Operation
turned on. When the system fully engages, the when the passing signal is activated.
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in
light remains on. If the switch is on and the
Malfunction Indicator Light one of two ways:
indicator light continues to flash, the system is
not engaged. (MIL) ● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An
emission control system malfunction has
For additional information, see “Electronic lock- If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if
ing rear differential (E-Lock) system switch” later while the engine is running, it may indicate a the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in
in this section and “Electronic locking rear differ- potential emission control malfunction. the vehicle information display. If the fuel-
ential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and driv-
The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install
ing” section of this manual.
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
Front passenger air bag status or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make The light should turn off after a few
light sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed driving trips. If the light does not turn
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not
and the passenger front air bag will be OFF need to have your vehicle towed to the
depending on how the front passenger seat is After a few driving trips, the light should dealer.
turn off if no other potential emission control
being used. ● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An
system malfunction exists.
For front passenger air bag status light operation, engine misfire has been detected which may
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 damage the emission control system. To re-
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when duce or avoid emission control system dam-
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
the engine is not running, it indicates that the age:
restraint system” section of this manual.
vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys- – do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
High beam indicator light tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi- (72 km/h).
(blue) ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of – avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
This blue light comes on when the headlight high this manual. – avoid steep uphill grades.
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
are selected.
being hauled or towed.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking Turn signal/hazard indicator light while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dy-
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected namic Control system checked by a NISSAN
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have lights dealer.
your vehicle towed to the dealer. The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
switch is activated. operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear
CAUTION the system working when starting the vehicle or
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned accelerating, but this is normal.
Continued vehicle operation without hav-
on.
ing the emission control system checked The VDC system will be disabled and the VDC
and repaired as necessary could lead to Vehicle Dynamic Control light will illuminate when the electronic locking
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, rear differential (E-lock) system switch (if so
and possible damage to the emission con- (VDC) off indicator light
equipped) is turned on and the E-lock system is
trol system. engaged. If the E-lock system disengages or the
This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle
Security indicator light (if so Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF, the switch is turned off, the VDC system will be
transfer case is in the 4LO position ( enabled and the VDC light will turn off.
equipped) model), or when the Vehicle Dynamic Control
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in system is not functioning properly. This indicates
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper- Brake pad wear warning
indicates the security system equipped on the ating.
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
vehicle is operational. Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
For additional information, see “Security sys- again or restart the engine and the system will makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
tems” later in this section.
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec- pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
Slip indicator light tion of this manual. soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on Key reminder chime
This indicator will blink when the VDC system or when you place the ignition switch in the ON
the traction control system is operating, thus A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
position. The light will turn off after about 2 sec- while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove
alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction onds if the system is operational. If the light stays
limits. The road surface may be slippery. the key and take it with you when leaving the
on or comes on along with the indicator vehicle.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if
so equipped)

Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-
tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
ing the vehicle.

WIC1248 WIC1249
The vehicle information display ᭺ is located to
1 HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
the left of the speedometer. It displays such items INFORMATION DISPLAY
as:
Press the vehicle information display INFO but-
● automatic transmission position indicator ton ᭺ located on the instrument panel to toggle
1
● cruise control system information (if so through the following modes.
equipped) MPG → Range → Warning
● some indicators and warnings Rotate the INFO button ᭺ to highlight the de-
2
sired menu option within the selected mode.
Press the INFO button ᭺ to enter the high-
1
lighted menu.


The icons at the bottom of the display screen
show the options available:
ENTER — Press the INFO button to select
a highlighted option.
NEXT — Rotate the INFO button to high-
light an option.

WIC1166
Warning mode (if so equipped)
The warning mode can be selected to view any
warnings that may be present. Once the screen is
selected you have the option of skipping the
warning or viewing it in detail.
Warnings can be present for issues such as an
open door or low fuel. For more information about
potential warnings, see “Vehicle information dis-
play warnings and indicators” later in this section.


LIC2006
Vehicle information display warnings 4. Parking brake warning 8. 4WD shift indicator ( model)
and indicators 5. Cruise main switch indicator (if so equipped) 9. Automatic transmission position indicator
1. Door open warning 6. Cruise set switch indicator (if so equipped) 10. Loose fuel cap warning
2. Low fuel warning 7. Transfer 4LO position indicator ( 11. Check tire pressure warning
3. Low windshield-washer fluid warning model)

Door open warning Cruise set switch indicator (if so to N (Neutral). Make sure the transfer 4LO posi-
equipped) tion indicator illuminates when you shift the 4WD
This warning illuminates when a door has been shift switch to 4LO.
opened and the engine is running. This indicator illuminates while the vehicle speed
is controlled by the cruise control system. If the The indicator may blink while shifting from
Low fuel warning one drive mode to the other.
indicator blinks while the engine is running, it may
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the indicate the cruise control system is not function- 4WD shift indicator ( model)
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is ing properly. Have the system checked by a
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge NISSAN dealer. While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-
reaches E (Empty). There will be a small re- cator will illuminate the position selected by the
Transfer 4LO position indicator ( 4WD shift switch.
serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches E (Empty). model)
The 4WD shift indicator may blink while
Low windshield-washer fluid warning This indicator illuminates when the 4WD shift shifting from one drive mode to the other.
switch is set in the 4LO position with the ignition Automatic transmission position indicator
This warning illuminates when the windshield- switch placed in the ON position.
washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
washer fluid as necessary. See “Windshield- If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position position, this indicator shows the shift selector
washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it- and the indicator blinks, stop the vehicle, drive position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting
yourself” section of this manual. slowly forward and the indicator will turn on. and driving” section of this manual.
Parking brake warning When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the Loose fuel cap warning
vehicle, move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)
This warning illuminates when the parking brake This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is
position, then depress and turn the 4WD shift
is set and the vehicle is driven. not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been
switch to 4LO or 4H. refueled. See “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving
Cruise main switch indicator (if so
The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the checks and adjustments” section.
equipped)
switch while driving. Check tire pressure warning
This indicator illuminates when the cruise control
main switch is pushed. The indicator turns off You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch This warning appears when the low tire pressure
when the main switch is pushed again. When the between 4H and 4LO unless you have first warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire
cruise main switch indicator illuminates, the stopped the vehicle and moved the shift selector pressure is detected. If this warning appears,
cruise control system is operational. stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to

SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)

the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
the Tire and Loading Information label. See “Low prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
tire pressure warning light” earlier in this section exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a
in the “Starting and driving” section. brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,
well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
LIC0644 for discounts for various theft protection features.
Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-
tems: How to arm the vehicle security
system
● Vehicle security system (if so equipped)
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so armed even if the windows are open.)
equipped)
2. Remove the from the ignition switch.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so 3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors
equipped) can be locked with the key, power door lock
The vehicle security system provides visual and switch (if the door is opened, locked and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors then closed), or with the keyfob.
when the system is armed. It is not, however, a
motion detection type system that activates when
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.


Keyfob operation: ● If the key is turned slowly when locking The alarm is activated by:
the door, the system may not arm. Fur-
● Push the button on the keyfob. thermore, if the key is turned beyond ● opening a door without using the key or
All doors lock. The hazard lights flash the vertical position toward the unlock keyfob (even if the door is unlocked by using
twice and the horn beeps once to indicate position to remove the key, the system the inside lock knob or the power door lock
all doors are locked. may be disarmed when the key is re- switch).
moved. If the indicator light fails to
● When the button is pushed with glow for a period of time, unlock the
How to stop an activated alarm
all doors locked, the hazard lights flash door once and lock it again. The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
minder that the doors are already locked. ● Even when the driver and/or passengers door with the key or by pressing the button
are in the vehicle, the system will arm on the keyfob.
The horn may or may not beep. Refer to with all doors closed and locked with the
“Silencing the horn beep feature” (vehicles ignition switch in the OFF position. NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
without navigation system) in the “Pre- SYSTEM (if so equipped)
driving checks and adjustments” section or ● The lockable bedside storage com-
“Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles with partment (if so equipped) is not pro- The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
navigation system) in the “Display screen, tected by the vehicle security system. allow the engine to start without the use of a
heater, air conditioner, audio and phone sys- registered key.
Vehicle security system activation
tems” section. If the engine fails to start using a registered key
The vehicle security system will give the following (for example, when interference is caused by
4. Confirm that the indicator light comes alarm:
another registered key, an automated toll road
on. The light stays on for about 30
seconds. The vehicle security system is now ● The headlights blink and the horn sounds device or automatic payment device on the key
pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve- intermittently. ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
hicle security system automatically shifts ● The alarm automatically turns off after a pe- cedures:
into the armed phase. The light begins riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates if 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm for approximately 5 seconds.
30-second pre-arm time period, the door is can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door
unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the with the key or by pressing the button 2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
ignition switch is placed to ACC or ON, the on the keyfob. position, and wait approximately 10 sec-
system will not arm. onds.

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT
ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)
This device complies with part 15 of the LIC0474 LIC0965
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the follow- Security indicator light SWITCH OPERATION
ing two conditions; The security indicator light blinks whenever the The windshield wiper and washer operates when
(1) This device may not cause harmful in- ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC the ignition switch is in the ON position.
terference, and (2) this device must accept position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-
hicle Immobilizer System is operational. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
any interference received, including inter- following speed:
ference that may cause undesired opera- If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
tion of the device. functioning, the light will remain on while the ᭺
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
ignition switch is placed in the ON position. can be adjusted by turning the knob toward
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE- If the light still remains on and/or the en-
᭺ (Slower) or ᭺ (Faster). Also, the inter-
A B

SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD mittent operation speed varies in accor-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER- NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-
ATE THE EQUIPMENT. when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
tent operation speed will be faster.)
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
NOTE:
CAUTION
You can turn on or turn off the driving ● Do not operate the washer continu-
speed dependent intermittent wiper func- ously for more than 30 seconds.
tion for vehicles with navigation system.
Refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in the ● Do not operate the washer if the
“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, au- windshield-washer reservoir is empty.
dio and phone systems” section later in this ● Do not fill the windshield-washer reser-
manual. voir with washer fluid concentrates at
᭺
2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation full strength. So methyl alcohol based
windshield-washer fluid concentrates
᭺
3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera- may permanently stain the grille if
tion spilled with filling the windshield-
Push the lever up ᭺ to have one sweep opera-
4 washer fluid reservoir.
tion (MIST) of the wiper. ● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con- LIC0488

Pull the lever toward you ᭺ to operate the
5 centrates with water to the manufactur- Type A
washer. The wiper will also operate several times. er’s recommended levels before pour- To defrost the rear window glass and outside
ing the fluid into the windshield-washer mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
WARNING reservoir. Do not use the windshield- push the rear window defroster switch on. The
washer reservoir to mix the windshield- rear window defroster indicator light on the
In freezing temperatures the washer solu- washer fluid concentrate and water. switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
tion may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an the defroster off.
accident. Warm the windshield with the The rear window defroster automatically turns off
defroster before you wash the windshield. after approximately 15 minutes.


HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH

LIC1173 LIC1158 SIC2745
Type B Type C Type A
NOTE: HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
CAUTION
If the rear power window (if so equipped) is
lowered while the defroster switch is on,
When cleaning the inner side of the rear Lighting
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
the rear window defroster will automati-
cally shut off. The heated outside mirrors (if
age the rear window defroster. ᭺
1 When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
so equipped) will remain on. The rear win- instrument panel lights come on.
dow defroster will automatically turn on
when the rear power window is fully closed ᭺
2 When turning the switch to the posi-
if the switch is on. tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.


WIC1250 SIC3019 WIC1251
Type B Type C Autolight system (if so equipped)
CAUTION The autolight system allows the headlights to be
Use the headlights with the engine run- set so they turn on and off automatically. The
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle autolight system can:
battery. ● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights au-
tomatically when it is dark.
● Turn off all the lights when it is light.
● Keep all the lights on for a period of time after
you place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and all doors are closed.


To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion ᭺.
1

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and a door is opened and left open, the
headlights remain ON for a period of time. If
another door is opened while the headlights are
on, then the timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
LIC0836 WIC1252
the OFF, , or position.
Be sure you do not put anything on top of Headlight beam select
the autolight sensor ᭺ located on the top
1
side of the instrument panel. The autolight ᭺
1 To select the high beam function, push the
sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov- lever forward. The high beam lights come on
ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is and the light illuminates.
dark out and the headlights will illuminate.
If this occurs while parked with the engine ᭺
2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, your vehicle’s battery could be-
᭺
3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.
come discharged.
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is in the
or position, the headlights will turn off after
a period of time.

After the headlights automatically turn off with the If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
headlight switch in the or position, started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
the headlights will illuminate again if the headlight nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
switch is moved to the OFF position and then the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
turned to the or position. is placed in the OFF position.
CAUTION WARNING
Even though the battery saver feature au- When the daytime running light system is
tomatically turns off the headlights after a active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
period of time, you should turn the head- on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
light switch to the OFF position when the headlights. Failure to do so could cause
engine is not running to avoid discharging an accident injuring yourself and others.
the vehicle battery.
WIC1506
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only) INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
duced intensity when the engine is started with The instrument brightness control operates when
the parking brake released. The daytime running the headlight control switch is in
lights operate with the headlight switch in the the , or AUTO position (with auto-
OFF position or in the position. Turn the lights activated).
headlight switch to the position for full Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-
illumination when driving at night. ment panel lights when driving at night.


HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH

WIC1253 WIC1254 LIC0394
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
Turn signal To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch tions. All turn signal lights flash.
to the position, then turn the fog light
᭺
1 Move the lever up or down to signal the
switch to the position. WARNING
turning direction. When the turn is com-
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically. To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch ● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head- move the vehicle well off the road.
Lane change signal lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
᭺
2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up or the position.
while moving on the highway unless
down to the point where the indicator light To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch unusual circumstances force you to
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch. to the OFF position. drive so slowly that your vehicle might
The headlights must be on and the low beams become a hazard to other traffic.
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam ● Turn signals do not work when the haz-
headlights are selected. ard warning flasher lights are on.


CARGO LAMP SWITCH (if so HORN
equipped)

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.

LIC0616 LIC0604
To turn on the cargo lamp, push the switch down To sound the horn, push near the horn icon of the
to the ON position. The tailgate lights (if so steering wheel.
equipped) will also illuminate when the cargo
lamp switch is in the ON position. WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
CAUTION
could affect proper operation of the
Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
position when you leave the vehicle for pering with the supplemental front air bag
extended periods of time, otherwise the system may result in serious personal
battery will go dead. injury.


HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)

WARNING ● If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
switch off and have the system checked
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
by your NISSAN dealer.
monitor elevated seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in body parts ● The battery could run down if the seat
that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater is operated while the engine is
heater by such people could result in se- not running.
rious injury.

CAUTION
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
WIC1441
● Do not put anything on the seat which
1. Start the engine. insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
desired, depending on the temperature. The may become overheated.
indicator light in the switch will illuminate. ● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
automatically turning the heater on and off.
heater.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on. ● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
3. When the seat is warmed or before you dry cloth.
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off. ● When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
lar materials.


VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR
OFF SWITCH DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM
SWITCH (if so equipped)
When the E-Lock switch is turned ON, the indi-
cator light will flash until the system engages.
However, if all operation conditions listed above
are not met or the system becomes disengaged,
the indicator light will continue to flash.
The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled
and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock
system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light
illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON.
See “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)
system” in the “Starting and Driving” section for
further explanation and system limitations.
LIC1548 LIC0729
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle The Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) WARNING
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv- system can help provide added traction if the
ing conditions. vehicle is stuck or becoming stuck. ● Never leave the E-Lock system ON
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC when driving on paved or hard-surfaced
To activate the E-Lock system: roads. Turning the vehicle may result in
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced ● the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position the rear wheels slipping and result in an
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If (4-wheel drive vehicles), accident and personal injury. After us-
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck ing the E-Lock system to free the ve-
● the vehicle must be stopped or moving at 4 hicle, turn the system OFF.
vehicle, turn the VDC system off. MPH (7 km/h) or less, and
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
● the E-Lock system switch must be turned
switch. The indicator will come on. ON.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and
driving” section.

REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(if so equipped)

● Use the E-Lock system only when free- The rear sonar system can be disabled by push-
ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position ing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled,
before using the E-Lock system. Never the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.
use the E-Lock system on a slippery Push the switch again to enable the system. The
road surface such as snow or ice sur- indicator light will go off.
face. Using the E-Lock system when The system will automatically reset the next time
driving in these road conditions may the ignition switch is turned on.
cause unexpected movement of the ve-
hicle during engine braking, accelerat- See “Rear sonar system” in the “Starting and
ing or turning, which may result in an driving” section.
accident and serious personal injury.

CAUTION
● After using the E-Lock system, turn the LIC0471
switch OFF to prevent possible damage
to driveline components from extended WARNING
use. The rear sonar system is a convenience
● Do not drive over 12 MPH (20 km/h) but it is not a substitute for proper back-
when the system is engaged. Doing so ing. Always turn and check that it is safe to
could result in possible damage to the do so before backing up. Always back up
driveline. slowly.
● Do not turn on the E-lock system while The rear sonar system is active when the ignition
the tires are spinning. Doing so could switch is placed to the ON position and the shift
damage drivetrain components. selector is in R (Reverse).
When sensors detect obstacles within 5.9 ft (1.8
m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.


TOW MODE SWITCH POWER OUTLET

For additional information, refer to “Tow mode” in
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion later in this manual.

LIC0594 WIC1404
Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy Front row
trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle
in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light
trailer/light load will not cause any damage. How-
ever, fuel economy may be reduced, and the
transmission/engine driving characteristics may
feel unusual.
Press the tow mode switch to activate tow mode.
The indicator light on the tow mode switch illumi-
nates when tow mode is selected. Press the tow
mode switch again to turn tow mode OFF.
Tow mode is automatically canceled when the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.


CAUTION
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
● Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
● Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
WIC0643 LIC0618 ● Use power outlets with the engine running
2nd row (if so equipped) Inside center armrest (if so equipped) to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
The power outlets are for powering electrical ● Avoid using power outlets when the air
accessories such as cellular telephones. conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
The power outlets located on the driver’s side of
the instrument panel and in the truck box are ● Before inserting or disconnecting a
powered directly by the vehicle’s battery. plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
The power outlets located on the passenger’s ● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
side of the instrument panel, inside the center good contact is not made, the plug may
armrest, and in the 2nd row are powered only overheat or the internal temperature
when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or fuse may open.
ON position.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
Open the cap to use a power outlet. cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.


STORAGE

LIC0617 LIC0565 LIC0566
In truck box (if so equipped) Side tray Center tray (if so equipped)
Do not use the outlet located in the truck box with INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE
accessories that exceed 12 volt, 120W (15A) TRAYS
power draw . Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
WARNING
CAUTION Do not place sharp objects in the trays to
help prevent injury in an accident or sud-
For the power outlet located in the bed of den stop.
the truck, do not use with accessories that
exceed a 12 volt, 120W (15A) power draw. The rubber mats can be removed for cleaning.
Do not use double adapters or more than
one electrical accessory.


LIC1369 LIC1370 LIC1371
CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped) Console box storage Console box lock
Console box storage trays Pull up on the lever ᭺ to open the console box lid
1 Use the master key to lock ᭺ or unlock ᭺ the
1 2
᭺.
2 console box.


LIC0621 LIC0578
CENTER ARMREST STORAGE (if so GLOVE BOX
equipped) Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
To access the center armrest storage area, lower Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove box
the center armrest and lift the lid. lock (if so equipped). The valet key cannot be
used.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.


CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

LIC0567 LIC0589
SUNGLASSES HOLDER (if so MAP POCKETS
equipped)
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

WARNING
● Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to prevent an accident.


LIC0575 LIC0568 LIC0569

SEATBACK POCKET (if so equipped) Small bin (if so equipped) Medium bin (if so equipped)
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (if so Storage bins
The seatback pocket is located on the back of the
driver’s seat. The pocket can be used to store equipped)
maps.
WARNING
Keep storage bins closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
Push the button to open a storage bin.
Push the lid up to close.


LIC1372 LIC0620 LIC1373
Front — Type A Front — Type B Adjustable (if so equipped)
CUP HOLDERS Position the arm on the adjustable cup holder so
that the cup is held securely.
CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.


LIC0622 LIC0554 LIC0556
Armrest (if so equipped) 2nd row (rear of front console) 2nd row bench (if so equipped)
(if so equipped)
To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of front
console), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid.


LIC0558 LIC0624 LIC0626
Bottle holder — Type A Bottle holder — Type B GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)
CAUTION The grocery hooks allow for standard size plastic
● Do not use bottle holder for any other grocery bags to hang side by side.
objects that could be thrown about in To access the grocery hooks, fold up the rear
the vehicle and possibly injure people bench seat. See “Folding the rear bench seat” in
during sudden braking or an accident. the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid restraint system” section earlier in this manual.
containers.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 18
lbs (8 kg) to a single grocery hook.


WINDOWS

CAUTION POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)
● Do not store a total load of more than 22 WARNING
lbs (10 kg) inside the storage
compartment. ● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
● Do not use the storage compartment or it is in motion and before closing the
storage compartment lid as a step. Do- windows. Use the window lock switch
ing so may damage them. to prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
LIC0625 dren could become involved in serious
LOCKABLE BEDSIDE STORAGE accidents.
COMPARTMENT (if so equipped) The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for a
To access the bedside storage compartment, period of time after the ignition switch is placed in
hold the key hole cover open and insert the the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
master key. Turn the key clockwise to unlock the door is opened during this period of time, the
lid. power to the windows is canceled.
The tray inside the bedside storage compartment
is adjustable.
The bedside storage compartment will automati-
cally lock when the lid is closed. You do not need
to use the key.


Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close the front and rear
passenger windows.
To open a window, push the switch and hold it
down. To close a window, pull the switch and
hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function
at any time, simply release the switch.

WIC0845 LIC0580
1. Window lock button Front passenger’s power window
2. Power door lock switch switch
3. Front passenger side automatic switch
The passenger’s window switch operates only
4. Right rear passenger window switch
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
5. Left rear passenger window switch the window, push the switch and hold it down ᭺.
1
6. Driver side automatic switch To close the window, pull the switch up ᭺.2


Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
curs.

WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
LIC0581 LIC0410 cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
Rear power window switch Automatic operation the vehicle before closing the window.
The rear power window switches open or close To fully open a window equipped with automatic If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,
only the corresponding windows. To open the operation, press the window switch down (only or jump started, the power window auto-reverse
window, push the switch and hold it down ᭺. To
1 driver’s side shown) to the second detent and function may not operate properly. If this occurs,
close the window, pull the switch up ᭺.
2
release it; it need not be held. The window auto- please contact the dealer to re-initialize the
Locking passengers’ windows matically opens all the way. To stop the window, power window auto-reverse system.
lift the switch up while the window is opening. If the control unit detects something caught in a
When the window lock button is depressed, only
To fully close a window equipped with automatic window equipped with automatic operation as it
the driver’s side window can be opened or
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent is closing, the window will be immediately low-
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the ered.
function.
window, press the switch down while the window
is closing.


WIC0263 LIC0627 LIC1553
MANUAL WINDOWS (if so equipped) REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if so REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
The side windows can be opened or closed by equipped) (if so equipped)
turning the hand crank on each door. Squeeze the handles of the lever ᭺, then slide
1 To open the rear power window, push in and hold
the window open ᭺.
2 the switch.
To close the rear power window, pull out and hold
the switch.
To stop the opening or closing function at any
time, simply release the switch.


MOONROOF (if so equipped)

NOTE: To open or close the moonroof part way, push the
switch in any direction ᭺ while the moonroof is
5
If the rear power window (if so equipped) is
lowered while the defroster switch is on, sliding open or closed to stop it in the desired
the rear window defroster will automati- position.
cally shut off. The heated outside mirrors (if Tilting the moonroof
so equipped) will remain on. The rear win-
dow defroster will automatically turn on To tilt the moonroof up, push the tilt switch to-
when the rear power window is fully closed ward the up position ᭺.
1
if the switch is on.
To tilt the moonroof down, push the tilt switch
toward the down position ᭺.
2

Restarting the moonroof sliding switch
The sliding switch will become inoperable after
WIC0812
the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality
detected. Use the following reset procedure to
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition
return moonroof operation to normal.
switch is placed in the ON position. The auto-
matic moonroof is operational for a period of time, 1. If the moonroof lid is open, push the tilting
even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or switch repeatedly toward the down position
OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front ᭺ to fully close the lid.
2
passenger’s door is opened during this period of
2. Push and hold the tilting switch for more
time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.
than 2 seconds toward the down position
Sliding the moonroof ᭺ to reestablish the lid’s home position.
2

To fully open the moonroof, push the switch to- The moonroof should now operate normally.
ward the open position ᭺.
3

To fully close the moonroof, push the switch
toward the close position ᭺.
4


Auto-reverse function (when closing or When tilting down: Sunshade
tilting down the moonroof) If the control unit detects something caught in the Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-
The auto-reverse function can be activated when moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im- ward or backward.
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto- mediately tilt up.
If the moonroof does not close
matic operation when the ignition switch is If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-
placed in the ON position or for a period of time peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds moonroof.
position. after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
Depending on the environment or driving gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
conditions, the auto-reverse function may moonroof.
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof WARNING
occurs. ● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
WARNING Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which ● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
cannot be detected. Make sure that all extend any portion of their body out of
passengers have their hands, etc., inside the moonroof opening while the vehicle
the vehicle before closing the moonroof. is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
When closing:
If the control unit detects something caught in the CAUTION
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof ● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
will immediately open backward. from the moonroof before opening.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.


INTERIOR LIGHT

The lights will turn off while the timer is activated
when:
● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a
key, or the power door lock switch.
● The ignition switch is turned ON.
When the switch is in the OFF position ᭺, the 3
interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door
position. The puddle lights (if so equipped) and
cargo light come on when any front or rear pas-
senger door is opened.
The lights will turn off automatically after a period
of time while doors are open to prevent the bat-
LIC0585 LIC0630 tery from becoming discharged.
Type A Type B
● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key NOTE:
The interior light has a three-position switch and
operates regardless of ignition switch position. or the power door lock switch while all doors The footwell and door step lights (if so
are closed and the ignition switch is in the equipped) illuminate when the driver and
When the switch is in the ON position ᭺, the 1
OFF position. passenger doors are open regardless of
interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi- the interior light switch position. These
tion. The lights will go off after a period of time ● The driver’s door is opened and then closed
while the key is removed from the ignition lights will turn off automatically after a
unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON period of time while doors are open to
position. switch.
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
When the switch is in the DOOR or normal ● The key is removed from the ignition switch charged.
while all doors are closed.
operation position ᭺, the interior lights, puddle
2
lights (if so equipped) and cargo light will stay on CAUTION
for a period of time when: Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped) MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)

LIC0587 LIC0623 LIC0586
CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped) The personal lights on the overhead console can To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To
be swiveled 360 degrees. To turn on the light, turn them off, press the switches again.
The console light ᭺ will turn on whenever the
1
press the button. Press the button again to turn
parking lights or headlights are illuminated. off the light. CAUTION
The console light brightness can be adjusted Do not use for extended periods of time
with the illumination brightness control. with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.


HOMELINKா UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver provides a
WARNING
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up
to three individual hand-held transmitters into ● Do not use the HomeLinkா Universal
one built-in device. Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver: verse features as required by federal
● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) safety standards. (These standards be-
devices such as garage doors, gates, home came effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
and office lighting, entry door locks and se-
rage door opener which cannot detect
curity systems.
an object in the path of a closing garage
● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No door and then automatically stop and
separate batteries are required. If the vehi- reverse, does not meet current federal
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon- safety standards. Using a garage door
nected, HomeLinkா will retain all program- opener without these features in- WIC0986
ming. creases the risk of serious injury or
death. PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா
Once the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
● During the programming procedure 1. To begin, press and hold the two outer
is programmed, retain the original trans- HomeLinkா buttons (to clear the memory)
your garage door or security gate will
mitter for future programming procedures
open and close (if the transmitter is until the indicator light ᭺ blinks (after 20
1
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon within range). Make sure that people or seconds). Release both buttons.
sale of the vehicle, the programmed objects are clear of the garage door,
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver buttons 2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter
gate, etc. that you are programming. 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
should be erased for security purposes. For
additional information, refer to “Program- ● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned HomeLinkா surface.
ming HomeLinkா” later in this section. off while programming the HomeLinkா
Universal Transceiver.


grammed device, press and hold the pro- ton, quickly and firmly press and release the
grammed HomeLinkா button — releasing HomeLinkா button you’ve just programmed.
when the device begins to activate. Press and release the HomeLinkா button up
to 3 times to complete the training.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkா blinks
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid, 8. Your HomeLinkா button should now be pro-
HomeLinkா has picked up a “rolling code” grammed. (To program the remaining
garage door opener signal. You will need to HomeLinkா buttons for additional door or
proceed with the next steps to train the gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)
HomeLinkா to complete the programming
which may require a ladder and another per- NOTE:
son for convenience.
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro- “clear” all previously programmed
gram button located on the garage door HomeLinkா buttons.
WIC0987 opener’s motor to activate the “training
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and mode”. This button is usually located near
programming your HomeLinkா buttons, refer to
hold both the HomeLinkா button you want to the antenna wire that hangs down from the
the HomeLinkா web site at: www.homelink.com
program and the hand-held transmitter but- motor. If the wire originates from under a
or call 1-800-355-3515.
ton. light lens, you will need to remove the lens to
access the program button. PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா FOR
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed. NOTE:
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator Once you have pressed and released the
held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-
light on the HomeLinkா flashes, changing program button on the garage door open-
onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you
HomeLinkா, continue to press and hold the
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds. have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.
HomeLinkா button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both Use the help of a second person for conve-
gramming HomeLinkா”) while you press and re-
buttons may be released. The rapidly flash- nience to assist when performing this step.
press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every
ing light indicates successful programming. 7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas- 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly
To activate the garage door or other pro- ing the garage door opener’s program but- (indicating successful programming).

NOTE: ● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 2. When the indicator light begins to flash
inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
When programming a garage door opener,
HomeLinkா surface. Hold the transmitter in hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76
etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-
that position for up to 15 seconds. If mm) away from the HomeLinkா surface.
ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
HomeLinkா is not programmed within that
sible damage to the garage door opener 3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
time, try holding the transmitter in another
components. button.
position – keeping the indicator light in view
OPERATING THE HOMELINKா at all times. 4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, first
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
If you continue to have programming difficulties,
light begins to flash rapidly, release both
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once pro- please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs
buttons.
grammed) may now be used to activate the ga- Department. The phone numbers are located in
rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap- the Foreword of this manual. The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button has
propriate programmed HomeLinkா Universal now been reprogrammed. The new device can
Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா button
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted. INFORMATION that was just programmed. This procedure will
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, not affect any other programmed HomeLinkா
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- buttons.
to clear all programming, press and hold the two
DIAGNOSIS
outside buttons and release when the indicator IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the hand- light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
held transmitter information: If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE codes of any non-rolling code device that has
● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
HOMELINKா BUTTON been programmed into HomeLinkா. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-
● position the hand-held transmitter with its To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver facturer or dealer of those devices for additional
battery area facing away from the button, complete the following. information.
HomeLinkா surface. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா but- When your vehicle is recovered, you will
● press and hold both the HomeLinkா and ton. Do not release the button until step 4 need to reprogram the HomeLinkா Univer-
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- has been completed. sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
ruption. information.

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. Note: Changes
or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, in-
cluding interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.


MEMO


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Vanity mirrors (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Locking with power door lock switch Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
Wide Open doors (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Automatic door locks (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Child safety rear door lock Truck box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
(Crew Cab models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-7 Tie down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

KEYS

A key number is only necessary when you have your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate cause the registration process will erase the
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer memory of all key codes previously registered
can duplicate it. into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
After the registration process, these components
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN
SYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped) Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time
You can only drive your vehicle using the master of registration will no longer be able to start your
or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN vehicle.
Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which
contains an electrical transponder, to come into
the key head.
contact with salt water. This could affect system
The master key can be used for all the locks. function.
WPD0128
1. Two master keys (black) with transpon- The valet key cannot be used for the console box
lock, the bedside storage compartment lock, or
der chip (if so equipped) and chrome
the glove box lock (if so equipped).
NISSAN brand symbol on one side
2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip To protect belongings when you leave a key with
(if so equipped) someone, give them the valet key only.
3. Key number plate Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
4. Transponder chip (if so equipped)
Additional or replacement keys:
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place If you still have a key, the key number is not
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
using the key number. NISSAN does not record cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN
of your key number plate.
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

DOORS

When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors can not be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING
● Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out
WPD0311 LPD0240
intruders.
Driver’s side Power (if so equipped)
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic. LOCKING WITH KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
● Do not leave children unattended inside Manual (if so equipped) unlock all doors at the same time.
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the Turning the key toward the front ᭺ of the vehicle
1
tivate switches or controls. Unattended vehicle ᭺. To unlock, turn the key toward the rear
1 locks all doors.
ous accidents. ᭺.
2
Turning the key one time toward the rear ᭺ of the
2
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
returning the key to neutral ᭺ (where the key can
3
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
all doors ᭺.
4

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Opening and closing windows
The driver’s door key operation allows you to
open and close windows equipped with auto-
matic operation at the same time.
● To open the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
● To close the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the front of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is locked.
Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.
LPD0241 WPD0381
Inside lock LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)
KNOB
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
lock knob to the lock position ᭺, then close the
1 the lock position ᭺. When locking the door this
1
door. way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the unlock position ᭺.
2 To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
side) to the unlock position ᭺.
2


Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock
position with the key in the ignition switch and any
door open, all doors will lock and then unlock
automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from
being accidently locked inside the vehicle.

LPD0278 LPD0266
WIDE OPEN DOORS (if so equipped) 2. From the outside, pull the door handle ᭺
1
toward you.
CAUTION
Do not open the Wide Open door to the
full open position while the fuel-filler door
is open; only open it as far as the first
detent. Opening the door to the full open
position may damage the fuel-filler door
and Wide Open door.
The Wide Open doors open nearly 180° to allow
access to the rear of the cab.
1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door.


LPD0267 LPD0265
From the inside, pull the inside door handle to- 3. Open the door to the desired position. The automatic unlock function can be de-
ward you. The door will unlock automatically. activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so vate the automatic door unlock system, perform
equipped) the following procedure:
● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle 1. Close all doors.
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
● All doors unlock automatically when the
transmission is placed in the P (Park) posi- 3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,
tion. push and hold the power door lock switch to
the position (UNLOCK) for more than
5 seconds.
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(if so equipped)

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
WARNING
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change. ● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
When the automatic door unlock system is deac- use a pacemaker should contact the
tivated, the doors do not unlock when the trans- electric medical equipment manufac-
mission is placed in the P (Park) position. To turer for the possible influences before
unlock the door manually, use the inside lock use.
knob or the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side). ● The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-
mits radio waves when the buttons are
pushed. The FAA advises radio waves
may affect aircraft navigation and com-
munication systems. Do not operate the
remote keyless entry keyfob while on
LPD0242 an airplane. Make sure the buttons are
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK not operated unintentionally when the
(Crew Cab models only) unit is stored for a flight.

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on the
from being opened accidentally, especially when interior lights and puddle lights (if so equipped),
small children are in the vehicle. and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob
from outside the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors. Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,
can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigation
When the lever is in the LOCK position, the
system, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”
door can be opened only from the outside.
in this section. For vehicles with navigation sys-
tem, refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in the
“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio
and phone systems” section in this manual.


Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle ● Do not strike the keyfob sharply against
before locking the doors. another object.
The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance of ● Do not change or modify the keyfob.
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The
effective distance depends upon the conditions ● Wetting may damage the keyfob. If the
keyfob gets wet, immediately wipe until
around the vehicle.
it is completely dry.
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one ● Do not place the keyfob for an extended
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase period in an area where temperatures
and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN exceed 140°F (60°C).
dealer.
● Do not attach the keyfob with a key
The keyfob will not function when: holder that contains a magnet.
● the battery is discharged. ● Do not place the keyfob near equip- LPD0209
ment that produces a magnetic field,
● the distance between the vehicle and the HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
such as a TV, audio equipment and per-
keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m). sonal computers. ENTRY SYSTEM
The panic alarm will not activate when the If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
key is in the ignition switch. ommends erasing the ID code of that key-
Locking doors
fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un- 1. Close all windows.
CAUTION authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For
information regarding the erasing proce- 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the keyfob: dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. 3. Close the hood and all doors.
● Do not allow the keyfob, which contains 4. Press the button on the keyfob. All
electrical components, to come into the doors lock. The hazard warning lights
contact with water or salt water. This flash twice and the horn beeps once to
could affect the system function. indicate all doors are locked.
● Do not drop the keyfob.


● When the button is pressed with all Press the button on the keyfob again
doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash within 5 seconds.
twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
minder that the doors are already locked. ● All doors unlock.
● The hazard warning lights flash once if all
● If a door is open and you press the
button, the doors will lock but the horn will doors are completely closed.
not beep and the hazard warning lights will The interior lights can be turned off without wait-
not flash. ing by inserting the key into the ignition switch
The horn may or may not beep. For vehicles and placing it in the ON or START position,
without navigation system, refer to “Silencing the locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the
horn beep feature” later in this section. For ve- interior light switch to the OFF position.
hicles with navigation system, refer to “How to
use the setting button” in the “Display screen, Auto relock
heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems” LPD0210
When the button on the keyfob is pressed,
section later in this manual. Unlocking doors all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute
unless one of the following operations is per-
Press the button on the keyfob once. formed:
● Only the driver’s door unlocks. ● Any door is opened.
● The hazard warning lights flash once if all ● A key is inserted into the ignition switch and
doors are completely closed with the ignition the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.
switch in any position except the ON posi-
tion. Linking the keyfob to automatic drive
● The interior lights and puddle lights (if so positioner memory
equipped) turn on and the light timer acti- If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive
vates for a period of time when the interior positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory
light switch is in the DOOR position with the setting.
ignition switch in any position except the ON
position. See “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.

Using the interior lights
Press the button on the keyfob once to
turn on the interior lights and puddle lights (if so
equipped).
For additional information, refer to “Interior light”
in the “Instruments and controls” section in this
manual.

LPD0211 LPD0262
Using the panic alarm Silencing the horn beep feature
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention vated using the keyfob.
by pressing and holding the button on the
keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds. NOTE:
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a If you change the horn beep and light flash
period of time. feature with the keyfob, the display screen
(if so equipped) will not show the current
The panic alarm stops when: mode and cannot be used to change the
● it has run for a period of time, or mode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-
vious mode and re-enable the display
● any button is pressed on the keyfob. screen control.


HOOD

To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si- LPD0244
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
᭺
1 Pull the hood lock release handle located WARNING
below the driver side instrument panel. The
hood will spring up slightly. ● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Fail-
᭺
2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
side as illustrated with your fingertips and open and result in an accident.
raise the hood.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make the engine compartment, to avoid injury
sure it locks into place. do not open the hood.


FUEL-FILLER DOOR

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank – Keep the pump nozzle in contact
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off with the container while you are fill-
automatically. Continued refueling may ing it.
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
– Use only approved portable fuel con-
spray and possibly a fire.
tainers for flammable liquid.
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a CAUTION
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emis- ● Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
sion control system. An incorrect cap label can operate on E-85. Fuel system
can result in a serious malfunction and or other damage can occur if E-85 is
possible injury. It could also cause used in vehicles that are not designed
Malfunction Indicator Light to run on E-85.
the
LPD0263 (MIL) to come on. ● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
FUEL-FILLER CAP tightened. It may take a few driving trips
attempt to start your vehicle.
for the message to be displayed. Failure
WARNING ● Do not fill a portable fuel container on a to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and truck bed liner, rubber truck bed mat, or after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ap-
highly explosive under certain condi- other insulating material. Static elec- pears may cause the Malfunction
tions. You could be burned or seriously tricity can cause an explosion of flam- Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
injured if it is misused or mishandled. mable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle
Always stop the engine and do not or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
smoke or allow open flames or sparks injury or death when filling portable fuel
near the vehicle when refueling. containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.


● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
If the light illuminates because
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
tighten or install the cap and continue
to drive the vehicle. The light
should turn off after a few driving trips.
If the light does not turn off after a
few driving trips, have the vehicle in-
spected by a NISSAN dealer.
● For additional information, see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section LPD0325 LRS2005
in this manual. To remove the fuel-filler cap: Loose Fuel Cap warning
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the
flush it away with water to avoid paint remove. odometer when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened
damage.
2. Loop the tether strap around the hook ᭺
1 correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It
For additional information, see “Fuel recommen- while refueling. may take a few driving trips for the message to be
dation (without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option)” and displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the
To install the fuel-filler cap: following:
“Flexible fuel vehicle (FFV) fuel recommendation”
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec- 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel- 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as pre-
tion in this manual. filler tube. viously described as soon as possible.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
single click is heard.


STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (if so
equipped)

3. Press the loose fuel cap warning reset but-
ton ᭺ on the instrument panel located be-
A
hind the steering wheel for about 1 second
to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning
᭺ after tightening the fuel-filler cap.
B

LPD0254 LPD0255
TILT OPERATION The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-
justed for driving comfort.
WARNING Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the
Do not adjust the steering wheel while brake and accelerator pedal position away from
driving. You could lose control of your the driver ᭺ or toward the driver ᭺.
1 2
vehicle and cause an accident.
The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-
Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the justed separately.
steering wheel up or down to the desired posi-
tion. WARNING
Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel Do not adjust the pedal position while
in place. driving. You can lose control of your ve-
hicle and cause an accident.


SUN VISORS

CAUTION
Do not adjust the pedal position with your
foot on the pedal.

LPD0264
Type B
᭺
1 To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
᭺
2 To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side.

LPD0273 ᭺
3 To block glare from the side and front, swing
Type A down the sub-sun visor (if so equipped).
᭺
4 Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)
in or out as needed.


CAUTION
● Do not store the sun visor before return-
ing the extension to its original
position.
● Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.

WPD0168 LPD0257
Type A Type B
VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover (if so
equipped). Some vanity mirrors are illuminated
and turn on when the mirror cover is open.


MIRRORS

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
cally dims during night time conditions and ac-
cording to the intensity of the headlights of the
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare
feature is activated when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-
matic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:
WPD0126 Do not hang any objects over the sensors LPD0446

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) ᭺ or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
1
Type A
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
The night position ᭺ reduces glare from the
1 sensors, resulting in improper operation. Type A
headlights of vehicles behind you at night. With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-
Use the day position ᭺ when driving in daylight
2 tion, press the button as described:
hours. ● To turn off the anti-glare feature, press
the button. The indicator light will turn
WARNING
off.
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity. ● To turn on the anti-glare feature, press
the button again. The indicator light
will turn on.
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-
matic anti-glare feature is operating.


For more information about the compass and The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-
compass features ᭺ (if so equipped), see
2 matic anti-glare feature is operating.
“Compass display” in the “Instruments and con-
For information on HomeLinkா Universal Trans-
trols” section of this manual.
ceiver operation, see “HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
For information on the compass and compass
features ᭺, see “Compass display” in the “In-
2
struments and controls” section of this manual.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
LPD0447 ● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
Type B the passenger side are closer than they
Type B appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press an accident. Use the inside mirror or
the button as described: glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
● To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,
press the button. The indicator light
will turn off.
● To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature,
press the button again. The indicator
light will turn on.


WPD0170 LPD0237 LPD0279
Manual control type (if so equipped) Electric control type (if so equipped) Trailer tow mirrors (if so equipped)
The outside mirror can be moved in any direction The outside mirror remote control will operate
for a better rear view. only when the ignition switch is placed in the WARNING
ACC or ON position. Objects viewed in the convex portion of
Move the small switch ᭺ to select the right or left
1 the trailer tow mirror are closer than they
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position appear. Be careful when changing lanes
using the large switch ᭺.2 or turning. Using only the convex mirror
could cause an accident. Use the other
mirrors or glance over your shoulder to
properly judge distances to other objects.
Use the outside mirror remote control to adjust
the top portion of the trailer tow mirror.


The lower portion of the trailer tow mirror can be
moved manually in any direction for a better rear
view.

LPD0268 LPD0259
Pull the trailer tow mirror outward to extend it to Type A
the desired position for better visibility while tow- Manual folding outside mirrors (if so
ing a trailer. equipped)
WARNING Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
Do not extend or retract mirrors while driv-
ing. You may lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.

CAUTION
Driving in tight spaces with mirrors ex-
tended may cause damage to the vehicle.


push the “OPEN” switch until the mirrors are in
the open position.
Automatic anti-glare outside mirror
(Driver’s side only) (if so equipped)
The outside mirror will automatically dim during
nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the
headlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti-
glare feature operates only when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The automatic anti-glare feature will be on when
starting the vehicle. The indicator light on the
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror will illuminate
LPD0269 LPD0196 when the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-
Type B ing.
Power folding outside mirrors (if so
equipped) To turn off the anti-glare feature, press the
button on the rearview mirror. The indicator light
CAUTION will turn off.

Do not manually fold the power folding To turn on the anti-glare feature again, press
mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can the button on the rearview mirror. The in-
damage the mirrors. dicator light will turn on.

Push the switch to open or close the mirrors. For information on the automatic anti-glare rear-
view mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare rearview
If one of the mirrors are manually operated or mirror” in this section.
bumped, the mirror body can become loose at
the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror op-
eration, cycle the mirrors by pushing the
“CLOSE” switch until completely closed, then


TRUCK BOX

Heated mirrors (if so equipped) For proper truck box loading see “Vehicle loading
information” in the “Technical and consumer in-
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, formation” section of this manual.
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
tional information, see “Rear window and outside WARNING
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual. ● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
LPD0270 ● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
TAILGATE seat and using a seat belt properly.

Opening the tailgate
Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower the
tailgate. The support cables hold the tailgate
open.
When closing the tailgate, make sure the latches
are securely locked.
Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate
down, unless equipped with NISSAN’s Bed
Extender (accessory) or equivalent in the
extended position.


Installing the tailgate
1. Insert the tailgate into the right side hinge.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and
insert into the left side hinge.
3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45 degree
angle and attach the tailgate support cables.
4. Close the tailgate securely.

LPD0271 LPD0272

Removing the tailgate Locking the tailgate
1. Release the tailgate support cables. To unlock the tailgate, turn the key toward the
passenger side of the vehicle ᭺. To lock, turn the
1
CAUTION key toward the driver side ᭺.
2

● The tailgate is heavy. Two people Both the master key and the valet key can be
should remove or install it. Be careful used to lock and unlock the tailgate.
not to drop it during removal.
● After releasing the support cables, do
not let the tailgate rest on the bumper.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle.
3. Pull the tailgate out from the left side hinge.
4. Slide the tailgate out of the right side hinge.

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system has two
WARNING
features:
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or ● Memory storage function
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, ● Entry/exit function
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.

LTI0102

TIE DOWN HOOKS
For your convenience, tie down hooks are placed
at each corner of the truck box. These may be
used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck
box.
● The weight of the cargo load must be evenly
distributed over both the front and the rear
axles.
● All cargo should be securely fastened with
ropes or straps to prevent it from shifting or
sliding within the vehicle.


mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, 2. While the indicator light for the memory
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-
tem” section of this manual and “Pedal posi- onds, press the button on the keyfob.
tion adjustment” and “Outside mirrors” ear- The indicator light will blink. After the indica-
lier in this section. tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that
During this step, do not place the ignition memory setting.
switch in any position other than ON.
With the key removed from the ignition switch,
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, press the button on the keyfob. The driv-
push the memory switch (1 or 2). er’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and out-
The indicator light for the pushed memory side mirrors will move to the memorized position.
switch will come on and stay on for approxi-
mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. NOTE:
After the indicator light goes off, the se- If a new memory position is saved to the
LPD0260
lected positions are stored in the selected memory switch, the keyfob automatically
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION memory (1 or 2). re-links.
Two positions for the driver’s seat, accelerator If a new memory is stored in the same memory
switch, the previous memory will be deleted. Confirming memory storage
and brake pedals, and outside mirrors can be
stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Linking a keyfob to a stored memory ● Place the ignition switch in the ON position
Follow these procedures to use the memory sys- and push the SET switch. If the main memory
tem.
position has not been stored, the indicator light will
Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory come on for approximately 0.5 seconds.
1. Place the shift selector in the P (Park) posi-
position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow- When the memory has stored the position,
tion. ing procedure. the indicator light will stay on for approxi-
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. 1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi- mately 5 seconds.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator and tion.
brake pedals, and outside mirrors to the
desired positions by manually operating
each adjusting switch. For additional infor-

● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, ● When the ignition switch is turned from
fuse opens, the memory storage function will and outside mirrors will move to the memorized ACC to ON while the shift selector is in the P
be canceled and must be restarted before a position with the indicator light blinking, and then (Park) position.
stored memory position can be set again. the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION celed. For vehicles with a navigation system, see
restart the memory storage function. You
“Vehicle electronic systems” in the “Display
can also restart the memory storage function This system is designed so that the driver’s seat screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone
using the following procedure. will automatically move when the shift selector is systems” section of this manual. For vehicles
1. Connect the battery cable or replace the placed in the P (Park) position. This allows the without navigation system, see your NISSAN
fuse. driver to get into and out of the driver’s seat more dealer.
easily.
2. Open and close the driver’s door more than Restarting the entry/exit function
2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK The driver’s seat will slide backward:
position. If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
● When the key is removed from the ignition
opens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.
Once the memory storage function has been switch and the driver’s door is opened.
Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
restarted, you can store a memory position. ● When the driver’s door is opened with the restart the entry/exit function. You can also restart
See “Memory storage function” in this sec- ignition switch placed in the LOCK position. the entry/exit function using the following proce-
tion. dure.
● When the ignition switch is turned from
Selecting the memorized position ACC to LOCK with the driver’s door open. 1. Connect the battery cable or replace the
fuse.
Set the shift selector to the P (Park) position, The driver’s seat will return to the previous posi-
then: tion: 2. Open and close the driver’s door more than
2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK
● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s ● When the key is inserted into the ignition position.
door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) or switch and the driver’s door is closed.
The entry/exit function should now work properly.
● Place the ignition switch in the ON position ● When the driver’s door is closed with the
and push the memory switch (1 or 2). ignition switch placed in the LOCK position.


SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system can be
adjusted and canceled. For vehicles with a navi-
The automatic drive positioner system will not gation system, see “Vehicle electronic systems”
work or will stop operating under the following in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner,
conditions: audio and phone systems” section of this manual.
● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 For vehicles without navigation system, see your
km/h). NISSAN dealer.
● When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the automatic drive positioner
is operating.
● When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
seat is turned on while the automatic drive
positioner is operating.
● When the seat has already been moved to
the memorized position.
● When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
● When the shift selector is moved from P
(Park) to any other position.
● When the driver’s door remains open more
than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is
not in the ON position.


4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,
audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
How to use the joystick and ENTER button . . . . . . . . 4-3 Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
How to use the TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Heater and air conditioner (manual) (Type A) Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
changer (Type A, B, C, D and E)
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Heater and air conditioner (manual) (Type B) Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Rear audio controls (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 NISSAN mobile entertainment system (MES)
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

Playing a digital video disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (if so
equipped)

WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air condi-
tioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in or-
der that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock. WHA0854

1. brightness control button (P. 4-13) 5. TRIP button (P. 4-4)
2. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-3) 6. DEST button*
3. Joystick and ENTER button (P. 4-3) 7. ROUTE button*
4. SETTING button (P. 4-7) 8. MAP button*

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

9. GUIDE VOICE button* If you use the system with the engine not SETTING UP THE START-UP
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long SCREEN
10. zoom out button* time, it will use up all the battery power,
and the engine will not start. When you place the ignition switch in the ACC or
11. zoom in button*
ON position, the system start-up warning is dis-
Reference symbols: played on the screen. Read the warning and
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual ENTER button — This is a button on the control select the “OK” key by pressing the ENTER but-
(if so equipped). panel. ton.
“Display” key — This is a select key on the screen. If you do not press the ENTER button, the Navi-
CAUTION By selecting this key you can proceed to the next gation system will not proceed to the next step in
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal function. the Navigation display.
display may break if it is hit with a hard If you do not touch a button or screen key for
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do
HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND
more than 1 minute on the system start-up warn-
not touch the liquid crystalline material, ENTER BUTTON ing screen, the screen will change to the audio
which contains a small amount of mer- Use the joystick to choose an item on the display screen automatically.
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to
immediately with soap and water. To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate
highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
● To clean the display, never use a rough to select the item or perform the action.
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
chemical cleaning agent. They will This button has two functions.
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
● Go back to the previous display (cancel).
● Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact If you press the BACK button during setup, the
with liquid will cause the system to setup will be canceled and/or the display will
malfunction. return to the previous screen.
● Finish setup.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running. In some screens pressing the BACK button ac-
cepts the changes made during setup.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

● Average Speed - Average speed driven
(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.
Resetting trip 1 and trip 2
Each trip screen can be reset to 0. Press the TRIP
button to select the TRIP screen to be reset.
● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-
ing the ENTER button, or
● Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-
mately 1.5 seconds.

LHA0552 LHA0553

HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON Fuel economy
When the TRIP button is pressed, the following Press the TRIP button to display Average Fuel
modes will display on the screen. Economy and Distance To Empty.
Warning message (if any) → TRIP 1 → TRIP 2 → Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)
FUEL ECONOMY → MAINTENANCE → Audio
or OFF → TRIP 1 The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The
Each trip display tracks an independent trip and display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3
displays the following: mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting the
● Elapsed Time - Journey time since the last battery cables, the display will show (**.*).
reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59
minutes.
● Driving Distance - Distance driven (mile or
km) since the last reset.

Resetting fuel economy
The average fuel economy calculation can be
reset to 0. Press the TRIP button repeatedly until
the FUEL ECONOMY menu is shown, then ei-
ther:
● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-
● Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-
mately 1.5 seconds.
Distance to empty (MI or km)
The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
LHA0554 LHA0555
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel Maintenance items Changing the maintenance interval
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display Select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level Press the TRIP button to display maintenance
information or set maintenance intervals for the using the joystick and press the ENTER button to
is low, the DTE display will change to (*). display the screen to change the maintenance
following:
interval.
NOTE: ● Engine Oil
Select the “Maintenance Schedule” key using the
● If the amount of fuel added while the ignition ● Tire Rotation joystick and move the joystick to right or left to set
switch is in the OFF position is small, the the maintenance interval.
display just before the ignition switch is ● Tire Pressure (if so equipped)
placed in the OFF position may continue to For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to “Tire
be displayed. pressure information” later in this section.
● When driving uphill or rounding curves, the
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily
change the display.


● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition the next time the vehicle will be driven.
To return to the previous display after the MAIN-
TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press
the BACK button.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays
each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
● “Reset” key is selected.
● “Display Maintenance Notification” is set to
OFF.
● The maintenance interval is set again.
LHA0556 LHA0483
Resetting the maintenance interval Displaying the maintenance notice re-
The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION mainte- minder
nance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilome- Select the “Display Maintenance Notification”
ters). key and press the ENTER button to display the
Select the “Reset” key using the joystick and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically
press the ENTER button. at the set maintenance interval.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE
OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically
displayed as shown when both of the following
conditions are met:
● The vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.


Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the
heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the
outside temperature.
In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-
played on the screen:
LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
LHA0557 LHA0558
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
Tire pressure information light will remain on after 1 minute. Con- HOW TO USE THE SETTING
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as BUTTON
To display tire pressure information, press the possible for tire replacement and/or
TRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCE system resetting. When the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-
screen is displayed. Select the “Tire Pressure” TINGS screen will appear on the display. You can
key using the joystick and press the ENTER but- ● Replacing tires with those not originally select and/or adjust several functions, features
ton. specified by NISSAN could affect the and modes that are available for your vehicle.
proper operation of the TPMS. Move the joystick and press the ENTER button to
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi- select each item to be set.
cates that the pressure is being measured. After
a few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will
be displayed randomly.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on
the screen does not correspond with the actual
order of the tire position.


WHA0855 WHA0716 LHA0642
Display settings Brightness/contrast: Display off:
Select the “Display” key and press the ENTER Select the “Brightness/Contrast” key to adjust Select the “Display Off” key. The indicator of the
button. The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will ap- the brightness and contrast of the map back- “Display Off” turns amber and the message
pear. ground. Use the joystick to adjust the brightness above will be displayed briefly. When the audio,
to darker or brighter and the contrast to lower or HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode
higher. button on the control panel is operated, the dis-
play turns on for that operation. If one of the
The new settings are automatically saved when
control panel buttons is pressed, the display will
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
not automatically turn off until that operation is
button or any other mode button.
finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-
matically after 5 seconds.


To turn the screen on,
● Press the SETTING button and select the
“Display” key and then select the “Display
Off” key. Then set the screen to on by press-
● Hold the button for approximately 2
seconds and the message “resuming dis-
play” will appear and the “Display Off” key
will be automatically turned on (no amber
indicator).

LHA0559 LHA0564

Vehicle electronic systems Adjust Driver Seat When Exiting Vehicle:
Select so the driver’s seat automatically moves
Select the “Vehicle Electronic Systems” key by back and returns to the original position for ease
using the joystick and pressing the ENTER but- of exit and entry.
ton. The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
screen will be displayed. Remote Unlock Driver’s Door First: Select to
change which doors will unlock first during an
You can set the following operating conditions by unlocking operation:
selecting the desired item using the joystick, then
pressing the ENTER button. The indicator light, Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors
box at the left of the selected item, alternately Keyless Remote Response — Horn: Select
turns on and off each time the ENTER button is to turn on or turn off the horn chirp mode used
pressed. when the LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

NOTE:
If you change the horn beep or the lamp
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will
not be changed with the display. Use the
keyfob to return to the previous mode and
re-enable the display control.
Auto Re-Lock Time: Select to set the length of
time before doors automatically re-lock.
Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights: Select
to change the sensitivity setting of the automatic
headlights:
● Lower: less sensitive, automatic headlights
LHA0565 will take longer to come on when the head- LHA0561
NOTE: light sensor senses less ambient light. System settings
If you change the horn beep or the lamp ● Higher: more sensitive, automatic headlights
Select the “System Settings” key by using the
flash feature with the keyfob, the display will come on quicker when the headlight
joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The
screen will not show the current mode. Use sensor senses less ambient light.
SYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed.
the keyfob to return to the previous mode Automatic Headlights Off Delay: Select to
and re-enable the display screen control. change the setting for the length of time the Language/unit
automatic headlights remain on after exiting the The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when
Keyless Remote Response — Lights: Select
vehicle. selecting the “Language/Unit” key and pressing
to turn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash
mode used when the LOCK or UNLOCK button Speed Dependent Wiper: Select to turn on or the ENTER button.
on the keyfob is pressed. turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent Language: English or French
wiper function.
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG
Return All Settings to Default: Select to
Metric — km, °C, L/100 km
change all VEHICLE ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS
to their default settings.

You can select the language and unit using the
joystick or pressing the ENTER button.
The settings are automatically saved when you
exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or
any other mode button.

LHA0562 LHA0566
Clock Setting daylight savings time:
Adjusting the time: Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust the
clock to daylight savings time.
Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and move the
joystick to the right or left to adjust the time. ON: Automatically adjusts for daylight savings
time.
The time will change step by step.
OFF: The current time is displayed.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
button or any other mode button.


LHA0567 LHA0568 LHA0563
Adjusting the time to the GPS: Selecting the time zone: 2. Select one of the following zones, depend-
Select the “Auto Adjust” key. 1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key. ing on the current location.

The time will be reset to the GPS time. The TIME ZONE screen will appear. ● Pacific zone
● Mountain zone
● Central zone
● Eastern zone
● Atlantic zone
● Newfoundland zone
After selection, the CLOCK SETTINGS screen
will appear.


VENTS

The GPS time (manual time) corresponding to
the selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zone
has been set as the initial (default) setting.
Beep setting
With this option ON, a beep will sound if any
audio button is pressed.
Navigation settings
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding these set-
tings.
Guidance voice settings
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- WHA1128
er’s Manual for information regarding these set- Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas-
tings. senger’s side vents ᭺, center vents ᭺, and rear
1 2
BUTTON passengers’ (if so equipped) vents ᭺ by moving
3
the vent slide and/or vent assemblies.
To change the display brightness, press
the button. Pressing the button again will
change the display to “DAY” or “NIGHT” display.
Then, adjust the brightness by moving the joy-
stick right or left.
If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the
BACK button is pressed, the display will return to
the previous display.


HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (Type A) (if so equipped)

WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals. WHA1406
Type A
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior 1. Fan speed control dial CONTROLS
air to become stale and the windows to 2. Front window defroster button
fog up. 3. Rear window defroster button Fan control dial
4. Air recirculation button The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
5. Temperature control dial controls fan speed.
6. Max A/C button
7. Air flow control buttons Air flow control buttons
8. Air conditioner ON/OFF button The air flow control buttons allow you to select
the air flow outlets.
MAX — Air flows from center and side
A/C vents with maximum cooling (air
conditioning).


— Air flows from center and side The air recirculation mode is only functional when 1. Press the button to the OFF position
vents. the air flow control mode is in the following for normal heating. The indicator light on
— Air flows from center and side positions: or . the button will go off.
vents and the front and rear floor
OFF position: 2. Press the air flow control button.
outlets.
Push the button again to turn air recircula-
— Air flows mainly from the front and 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger
rear floor outlets. tion.
compartment and distributed through the se-
— Air flows from defroster outlets and lected outlet. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
the front and rear floor outlets. sired position between the middle and the
Use the off position for normal heater or air con-
Temperature control dial hot position.
ditioner operation.
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
Air conditioner button Ventilation
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
This mode directs outside air to the side and
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the center ventilators.
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
desired position and push the button to
1. Press the button to the OFF position.
Air recirculation button turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
comes on when the air conditioner is operating. The indicator light on the button will
ON position: go off.
To turn off the air conditioner, push the
Push the button to recirculate air inside button again. 2. Press the air flow control button.
the vehicle.
The air conditioner cooling function oper- 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
Push the button to the on position when: ates only when the engine is running. tion.
● driving on a dusty road. HEATER OPERATION 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas- sired position.
Heating
senger compartment.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
● for maximum cooling when using the air con-
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
ditioner.
outlets. defrost/defog the windows.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the Bi-level heating ● When the position is selected, the air
position. conditioner automatically turns on (however,
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- and center vents and to the front and rear floor the indicator light on the button will
tion. outlets. not come on) if the outside temperature is
more than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- 1. Press the button to the OFF position. more than one minute, the air conditioning
sired position between the middle and the system will continue to operate until the ve-
hot position. The indicator light on the button will
go off. hicle is shut off, the fan is turned off or the
● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win- A/C button is used to turn off the compres-
dows, turn the fan control dial to the right 2. Press the air flow control button. sor, even if the air flow control dial is turned
and the temperature control to the full HOT to a position other than the position.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
position. This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
tion.
● When the position is selected, the air 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
the windshield. The mode automati-
conditioner automatically turns on (however, cally turns off, allowing outside air to be
sired position.
the indicator light on the button will drawn into the passenger compartment to
not come on) if the outside temperature is Heating and defogging further improve the defogging performance.
more than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for
more than one minute, the air conditioning This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind- Operating tips
system will continue to operate until the ve- shield.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
hicle is shut off, the fan is turned off or the and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
1. Press the air flow control button.
A/C button is used to turn off the compres- improves heater operation.
sor, even if the air flow control dial is turned 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
to a position other than the position. tion. AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
the windshield. The mode automati- sired position between the middle and the
cally turns off, allowing outside air to be desired position, and push in the button to
hot position. activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-
drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance. tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
are added to the heater operation.


The air conditioner cooling function oper- 1. Press the button to the OFF position. ● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ates only when the engine is running. The indicator light on the button will ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
go off. is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
Cooling malfunction.
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. 2. Press the air flow control button. ● If the engine coolant temperature
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
1. Press the button to the OFF position. perature over the normal range, turn
tion.
2. Press the air flow control button. the air conditioner off. See “If your
4. Press the button on. The indicator vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- light on the button will come on. emergency” section of this manual.
tion.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- AIR FLOW CHARTS
4. Press the button. The indicator light sired position. The following charts show the button and dial
on the button will come on. positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
Operating tips
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- cooling or defrosting. For additional information
sired position. ● Keep the windows closed while the air con- on heating and cooling see “Heater and air con-
ditioner is in operation. ditioner” in this section. The air recirculation
● For quick cooling when the outside tem- ( ) button should always be in the OFF
● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3
perature is high, push the button to position for heating and defrosting.
minutes with the windows open to vent hot
the ON position. The indicator light on
air from the passenger compartment. Then,
the button will come on. Be sure to close the windows. This allows the air con-
return the to the OFF position for nor- ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
mal cooling. The indicator light on the
● The air conditioning system should be
button will go off. You may also select MAX
operated for approximately 10 minutes
A/C for quick cooling.
at least once a month. This helps pre-
Dehumidified heating vent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.


WHA0916 WHA0917
Type A Type A

WHA0918 WHA0919
Type A Type A

WHA1362
Type A

(manual) (Type B) (if so equipped)

WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
people or animals. WHA0535
Type B
long periods as it may cause the interior 1. Fan speed control dial Air flow control dial
air to become stale and the windows to 2. Air recirculation button
The air flow control dial allows you to select the
fog up. 3. Temperature control dial
air flow outlets.
4. Air conditioner button
5. Air flow control dial MAX — Air flows from center and side
6. Rear window defroster switch (if so A/C vents with maximum cooling (air
equipped) conditioning).
— Air flows from center and side
CONTROLS vents.
Fan control dial — Air flows from center and side
vents and the front and rear floor
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
outlets.
controls fan speed.


— Air flows mainly from the front and The air recirculation mode is only functional when HEATER OPERATION
rear floor outlets. the air flow control mode is in the following Heating
— Air flows from defroster outlets positions: or .
and the front and rear floor outlets. This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
OFF position: outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
— Air flows mainly from defroster Push the button again to turn air recircula- outlets.
outlets. tion off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger
The air flow control dial also has intermediate compartment and distributed through the se- 1. Push the button to the OFF position
positions which allow the air flow to be distrib- lected outlet. for normal heating. The indicator light on
uted between 2 of the icon positions on the air Use the off position for normal heater or air con- the button will go off. ( will ap-
flow control dial. ditioner operation. pear on the display, if so equipped.)
Temperature control dial Air conditioner button 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust position.
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase desired position and push the button to
tion.
the temperature, turn the dial to the right. turn on the air conditioner. A/C will appear on the
display when the air conditioner is operating. To 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
Air recirculation button turn off the air conditioner, push the button sired position between the middle and the
again. The display will show A/C OFF. hot position.
ON position:
Push the button to recirculate air inside The air conditioner cooling function oper- Ventilation
the vehicle. ates only when the engine is running.
This mode directs outside air to the side and
Push the button to the on position when: Rear window and outside mirror (if so center ventilators.
● driving on a dusty road.
equipped) defroster switch
1. Push the button to the OFF position.
● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas- For more information about the rear window and The indicator light on the button will
senger compartment. outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch,
see “Rear window and outside mirror defroster go off. ( will appear on the display, if so
● for maximum cooling when using the air con- switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section equipped.)
ditioner. of this manual.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the ● When the position is selected, the air Heating and defogging
position. conditioner automatically turns on (however,
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-
the indicator light on the button will shield.
not come on) if the outside temperature is
tion.
more than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- more than one minute, the air conditioning position.
sired position. system will continue to operate until the ve-
hicle is shut off. This dehumidifies the air 2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
Defrosting or defogging which helps defog the windshield. tion.

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to The mode automatically turns off, al- 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
defrost/defog the windows. lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas- sired position between the middle and the
senger compartment to further improve the hot position.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the defogging performance.
● When the position is selected, the air
position.
Bi-level heating conditioner automatically turns on (however,
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- the indicator light on the button will
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
tion. and center vents and to the front and rear floor not come on and A/C will not appear on the
outlets. display, if so equipped) if the outside tem-
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- perature is more than 36°F (2°C). If in
sired position between the middle and the
1. Push the button to the OFF position. the mode for more than one minute,
hot position.
The indicator light on the button will the air conditioning system will continue to
● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win- go off. ( will appear on the display, if so operate until the vehicle is shut off. This
dows, turn the fan control dial to the right equipped.) dehumidifies the air which helps defog the
and the temperature control to the full HOT windshield. The mode automatically
position. 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn
position. into the passenger compartment to further
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- improve the defogging performance.
tion.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.

Operating tips ● For quick cooling when the outside tem- Operating tips
perature is high, push the button to
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades ● Keep the windows closed while the air con-
the ON position. The indicator light on
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This ditioner is in operation.
improves heater operation. the button will come on. ( will
appear on the display, if so equipped.) Be ● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION minutes with the windows open to vent hot
sure to return the to the OFF position air from the passenger compartment. Then,
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the for normal cooling. The indicator light on close the windows. This allows the air con-
desired position, and push in the button to the button will go off. ( will ap- ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
activate the air conditioner. When the air condi- pear on the display, if so equipped.) You may ● The air conditioning system should be
tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions also select MAX A/C for quick cooling. operated for approximately 10 minutes
are added to the heater operation. at least once a month. This helps pre-
Dehumidified heating
The air conditioner cooling function oper- vent damage to the system due to lack
ates only when the engine is running. This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air. of lubrication.
Cooling 1. Push the button to the OFF position. ● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
The indicator light on the button will ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
go off. ( will appear on the display, if so
malfunction.
1. Push the button to the OFF position. equipped.)
● If the engine coolant temperature
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
position. position. perature over the normal range, turn
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- 3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi- the air conditioner off. See “If your
tion. tion. vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
4. Push the button. The indicator light 4. Push the button on. The indicator
on the button will come on. (A/C will light on the button will come on. (A/C
appear on the display, if so equipped.) will appear on the display, if so equipped.)
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de- 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position. sired position.

AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. For additional information
on heating and cooling see “Heater and air con-
ditioner” in this section. The air recirculation
( ) button should always be in the OFF
position for heating and defrosting.

WHA1079
Type B

WHA1080 WHA1081
Type B Type B

WHA1082 WHA1471
Type B Type B

(automatic) (if so equipped)

long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling or heating (auto)
This mode may be normally used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a con-
stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan
LHA0877 speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Driver temperature control dial WARNING 1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. A/C ON/OFF button
3. Front window defroster button ● The air conditioner cooling function op- 2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right
erates only when the engine is running. to set the desired temperature. Driver and
4. Fan speed control dial
5. System OFF button ● Do not leave children or adults who passenger temperatures can be set inde-
6. Rear window defroster button would normally require the assistance pendently. Press DUAL to activate dual cli-
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets mate control functions. Turn the passenger’s
7. Air recirculation button
should also not be left alone. They side temperature control dial to the left or
8. Passenger temperature control dial could accidentally injure themselves or right to set the desired passenger’s tem-
9. DUAL button others through inadvertent operation of perature.
10. Air flow control buttons the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
11. AUTO button temperatures in a closed vehicle could ● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F
quickly become high enough to cause (24°C) for normal operation.
people or animals.


● The temperature of the passenger compart- ● When the control is activated, the air The air recirculation button will not be activated
ment will be maintained automatically. Air conditioner will automatically be turned on at when the air conditioner is in DEF, floor, or
flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C). If in floor/defrost mode.
are also controlled automatically. defrost mode for more than one minute, the Air flow control
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the air conditioning system will continue to op-
erate until the fan control is turned OFF, the Press the air flow control buttons to manually
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
vehicle is shut off or the A/C button is used control air flow and select the air outlet:
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function. to turn off the compressor even if an air flow — Air flows from center and side
button other than is selected. This vents.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging dehumidifies the air which helps defog the — Air flows from center and side
windshield. The air recirculation mode auto- vents and foot outlets.
1. Press the defroster control button to
matically turns off, allowing outside air to be — Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
turn the system on. The indicator light in the
drawn into the passenger compartment to
button will illuminate. — Air flows from defroster and foot
further improve the defogging performance.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right
outlets.
to set the desired temperature. MANUAL OPERATION — Air flows from defroster outlets.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the Fan speed control dial To turn system off
windows, turn the manual fan control to the Press the /OFF button.
Turn the fan speed control dial left or right
maximum position.
to manually control the fan speed or turn the OPERATING TIPS
● As soon as possible after the windshield is system on or off.
clean, press the AUTO button to return to ● When the engine coolant temperature and
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic outside air temperature are low, the air flow
the auto mode.
control of the fan speed. from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
Air recirculation not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-
Push the air recirculation button to recir- ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push the will operate normally.
AUTO button to return to automatic mode.


SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve- RADIO
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind. Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the PWR (power)/VOL (vol-
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s ume) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the
ozone layer. radio with the engine not running, the ignition
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re- switch should be placed in the ACC position.
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
Radio reception is affected by station signal
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
consumer information” section of this manual. normally are caused by these external influences.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ- Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
LIC0836 hicle may influence radio reception quality.
mentally friendly” air conditioning system.
The sunload sensor ᭺, located on the top center
1
of the instrument panel, helps the system main- WARNING
Radio reception
tain a constant temperature. Do not put anything Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
on or around this sensor. The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-
personal injury, any air conditioner ser- dio reception. These circuits are designed to
vice should be done only by an experi- extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-
enced technician with proper equipment. ity of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These char-
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.


Reception conditions will constantly change be- Static and flutter: During signal interference from SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, buildings, large hills or due to antenna position equipped)
signal distance and interference from other ve- (usually in conjunction with increased distance
hicles can work against ideal reception. De- from the station transmitter), static or flutter can When the satellite radio is used for the first time
scribed below are some of the factors that can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
affect your radio reception. treble control to reduce treble response. radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
Some cellular phones or other devices may Multipath reception: Because of the reflective radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected large building for satellite radio to receive all of
from the audio system speakers. Storing the de- signals reach the receiver at the same time. The the necessary data.
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi- signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
nate the noise. mentary flutter or loss of sound. No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
FM RADIO RECEPTION AM RADIO RECEPTION selected unless optional satellite receiver and
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi AM signals, because of their low frequency, can antenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM bend around objects and skip along the ground. service subscription is active. Satellite radio is
having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter- In addition, the signals can be bounced off the not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of Satellite radio performance may be affected if
station reception even if the FM station is within these characteristics, AM signals are also sub- cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is ject to interference as they travel from transmitter signal.
directly related to the distance between the to receiver.
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line- If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing antenna.
of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
off objects. affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from areas where no obstacles exist. ice to restore satellite radio reception.
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
and/or drift.
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.


Compact disc (CD) player ● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
CAUTION ● CDs that are in poor condition or are
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD dirty, scratched or covered with finger-
insert slot. This could damage the CD prints may not work properly.
and/or CD changer/player. ● The following CDs may not work prop-
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door erly:
closed could damage the CD and/or CD ● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
changer.
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time. ● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) ● Do not use the following CDs as they
round discs that have the “COMPACT may cause the CD player to malfunc-
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc tion:
or packaging. ● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
● During cold weather or rainy days, the ● CDs that are not round
player may malfunction due to the hu-
● CDs with a paper label
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player ● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
completely. have abnormal edges
LHA0099
● The player may skip while driving on ● This audio system can only play pre-
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS rough roads. recorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
● The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the compartment tempera- ● If the CD cannot be played, one of the
ture is extremely high or low. following messages will be displayed.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.

CHECK DISC: Compact disc with MP3 or WMA ● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor- Terms: are converted from analog to digital (A/D
rectly (the label side is facing up, conversion) per second.
etc.). ● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the ● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or most well-known compressed digital audio methods for writing data to media. Writing
warped and it is free of scratches. file format. This format allows for near “CD data once to the media is called a single
PRESS EJECT: quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of session, and writing more than once is called
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an a multisession.
This is an error due to excessive tem- audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the ● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
perature inside the player. Remove the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 contains information about the digital music
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD compression removes the redundant and file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
can be played when the temperature of irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-
the player returns to normal. human ear doesn’t hear. mation is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
UNPLAYABLE: ● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
The file is unplayable in this audio sys- compressed audio format created by Micro- * Windowsா and Windows Mediaா are regis-
tem (only MP3 or WMA CD). soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA tered trademarks and trademarks in the United
codec offers greater file compression than States of America and other countries of Micro-
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more soft Corporation of the USA.
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.


Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
● The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.

WHA1078
Playback order chart


Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Supported Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
versions*1 WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
Displayable character codes*2
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.


Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
before the music starts
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
Music cuts off or skips
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
files
Moves immediately to the When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there
next song when playing will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
the desired order


FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ЉAudio opera-
tion precautionsЉ earlier in this section.
Audio main operation
Power button and VOL control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, then press the PWR (power) button. If
you listen to the radio with the engine not running,
place the ignition switch in the ACC position. The
mode (radio or CD) that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off resumes play-
ing.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the PWR button again turns the system
off.
Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increase
volume or to the left to decrease volume.
WHA1075 MENU button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE,
1. PRESET A·B·C button 7. TUNE buttons BALANCE and CLOCK):
2. CD eject button 8. RPT button Press the MENU button to change the mode as
3. MENU button 9. PWR button/VOL control knob follows:
4. CD insert slot 10. RDM button
BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → Audio
5. CD button 11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
→ BAS
6. FM·AM button 12. SEEK buttons

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press Clock set Resetting the time
the MENU button until the desired mode appears
If the clock is not displayed with the ignition Hold the MENU button down and then press the
in the display. Press the SEEK button to adjust TUNE/SEEK button; the time will reset as fol-
switch in the ACC or ON position, you need to
Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also lows:
select the CLK ON mode. Press the MENU but-
use the SEEK button to adjust Fade and Balance
ton repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed. Use the ● If the displayed minutes before the reset are
modes. Fade adjusts the sound level between the
SEEK button to enable CLK ON mode. in the range of :00 - :29, the hour displayed
front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the
sound between the right and left speakers. 1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until before the reset will stay the same and the
CLOCK mode appears; press the SEEK minutes will be reset to :00.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly
button until CLK ON appears. ● If the displayed minutes before the reset are
in the range of :30 - :59, the hour displayed
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- 2. Press the MENU button again; the hours will
before the reset will advance by one hour
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically start flashing.
and the minutes will be reset to :00.
reappear after about 10 seconds.
3. Press the SEEK button or to For example, if the MENU button and the
NOTE: adjust the hour. TUNE/SEEK button are pressed while the time
displayed is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display
If the clock is enabled, pressing the MENU 4. Press the MENU button again; the display
will be reset to 8:00. If the buttons were pressed
button will change the mode as follows: will switch to the minute adjustment mode. while the time was between 8:30 and 8:59, the
BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → 5. The minutes will start flashing. Press SEEK display will be reset to 9:00. At the same time the
Hour adjustment → Minute adjustment → display will return to the audio.
Audio → BAS button or to adjust the minutes.
6. Press the MENU button again to exit the FM/AM radio operation
For more information on setting the clock, see
“Clock set” later in this section. clock set mode. FM·AM button:

Clock operation The display will return to the regular clock display Press the FM·AM button to change from AM ←→
after 10 seconds, or press the MENU button FM reception.
Press the MENU button until CLOCK is dis- again to return to the regular clock display.
played; use the SEEK button to turn the clock The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during
display on (CLK ON) or off (CLK OFF). FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
from stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE buttons: 1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change TUNE (rewind and fast
between storage banks. The radio displays
forward) buttons:
Manual tuning the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of
presets are active.
Press the TUNE or button for less When the TUNE or button is
than 0.5 seconds for manual tuning. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual pressed while the compact disc is playing, the
TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of compact disc plays at an increased speed while
To move quickly through the channels, press and the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is
hold either TUNE or button down until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes released, the compact disc returns to normal play
for more than 1.5 seconds. when the select button is pressed.) speed.

SEEK buttons: 3. The channel indicator will then come on and SEEK buttons:
the sound will resume. Programming is now
SEEK tuning complete. When is pressed while the compact disc
is playing, the next track following the present
Press the SEEK or button to seek 4. Other buttons can be set in the same man- one starts to play from the beginning.
through the frequencies. Seek tuning begins ner. Press several times to skip several tracks.
from low to high frequencies, or high to low If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-
frequencies, depending on which button is opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-
pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta- pears in the display window. (When the last track
case, reset the desired stations.
tion. Once the highest broadcasting station is on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is
reached, the radio continues in the seek mode at Compact disc (CD) player operation played.)
the lowest broadcasting station. If the radio is already operating, it automatically When is pressed, the track being played
Station memory operations: turns off and the compact disc begins to play. returns to the beginning. Press several
times to skip back several tracks. Each time the
18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to CD button: button is pressed, the CD moves back one track.
the A, B and C preset button in any combination When the CD button is pressed with a compact
of AM or FM stations. disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.


SEEK (Scan CDs) button: CD EJECT button:
Press and hold the SEEK button for more
than 1.5 seconds to scan through the first 10 When the button is pressed with a com-
seconds of a track on the compact disc. The pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
SCAN icon is flashed during scan mode. ejected.
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through When the button is pressed while the
all the tracks on the disc, or if the SEEK compact disc is being played, the compact disc
or button is pressed during the scan will eject and the system will turn off.
mode. CD IN indicator:
RPT button: CD IN indicator appears on the display when the
CD is loaded with the system on.
When the RPT button is pressed while the com-
pact disc is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
1 ←→ Normal
1: The track that is currently playing will be re-
peated.
RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while the com-
pact disc is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
RDM ←→ Normal
RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently play-
ing will be played randomly.


11. LOAD button
12. CD insert slot
13. CD eject button
14. POWER/VOLUME control knob
15. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons
16. Tuning and AUDIO control knob
(BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE and BAL-
ANCE)

*No satellite radio reception is available
and “NO SAT” is displayed when the
RADIO button is pressed to access
satellite radio stations unless optional
satellite receiver and antenna are in-
stalled and an XMா satellite radio ser-
vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.

WHA0864
Type A
1. SEEK/TRACK button 6. CD·DVD button
2. TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button 7. RADIO button*
3. DISP button 8. AUX button
4. SCAN RPT button 9. REAR ON·OFF button
5. PRESET A·B·C button 10. speaker control button

11. LOAD button
12. CD insert slot
13. CD eject button
ANCE)

SAT button is pressed to access satel-
lite radio stations unless optional satel-
lite receiver and antenna are installed
and an XMா satellite radio service sub-
scription is active. Satellite radio is not
available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

WHA0865
Type B
1. SEEK/TRACK button 6. CD button
2. TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button 7. FM button
3. DISP button 8. AM button
4. SCAN RPT button 9. SAT (satellite) button*
5. PRESET A·B·C button 10. AUX button


11. AUX button
12. DISP button
13. LOAD button
14. CD insert slot
15. CD eject button
ANCE)

SAT button is pressed unless optional
and Guam.

WHA0866
Type C
1. SEEK/TRACK button 6. H/M button (clock set buttons)
2. TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button 7. PRESET A·B·C button
3. Display 8. CD button
4. SCAN button 9. FM AM button
5. RPT RDM button 10. SAT (satellite) radio button*


11. REAR ON·OFF button
12. speaker control button
13. LOAD button
14. CD insert slot
15. CD eject button
ANCE)

and Guam.
WHA0867
Type D
1. SEEK/TRACK button 6. H/M button (clock set buttons)
2. TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button 7. PRESET A·B·C button
3. Display 8. CD·DVD button
4. SCAN RPT button 9. RADIO button*
5. DISP button 10. AUX button


11. CD insert slot
12. CD eject button
13. PWR/VOL (power/volume) control
knob
ANCE)

and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER
WHA1127
Type E
(Type A, B, C, D and E) (if so
1. PRESET A·B·C button 6. RADIO button*
equipped)
2. Display 7. AUX button For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
3. DISP/CLOCK button 8. SCAN RPT button tion precautions” earlier in this section.
4. SEEK/TRACK button 9. CAT FOLDER button No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
5. CD button 10. CD LOAD button SAT” is displayed when the SAT or RADIO button

is pressed to select satellite radio stations unless To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade and 2. The hours will start flashing. Press the CAT
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in- Balance, press the AUDIO knob until the desired FOLDER or button or SEEK
stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub- mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired TRACK or button, to adjust the
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust hours.
Fader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the 3. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to
Audio main operation sound level between the front and rear speakers switch to the minute adjustment.
POWER/VOLUME control: and Balance adjusts the sound between the right
and left speakers. 4. Press the CAT FOLDER or
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or button or SEEK TRACK or
position, and then push the POWER/VOLUME
HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left. button to adjust the minutes.
or PWR/VOL control knob while the system is off
to call up the mode (radio or CD) which was Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the 5. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to exit
playing immediately before the system was desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly the clock set mode.
turned off.
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- The display will return to the regular clock display
To turn the system off, press the wise, the radio or CD display will automatically after 7 seconds, or you may press the
POWER/VOLUME or PWR/VOL control knob. reappear after about 10 seconds. DISP/CLOCK button again to return to the regu-
lar clock display.
Turn the POWER/VOLUME or PWR/VOL con- Clock set (Type C and D only)
trol knob to adjust the volume. For setting the clock on Type A and B audio
1. Press and hold the H button to advance systems see “Adjusting the time” in this section.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen- hours.
sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume DISP (display) button:
changes as the driving speed changes. 2. Press and hold the M button to advance
minutes. The DISP (display) button will show text about
AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE, MP3, SAT or CD information in the audio display.
FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped): For setting the clock on Type A and B audio
systems see “Adjusting the time” in this section. CD display mode
Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as
To change the text displayed while playing a CD
follows: Clock set (Type E only)
with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button
BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE 1. Press the DISP/CLOCK button until it will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:
→ SSV (if so equipped) beeps (>1.5 seconds). Disc title ←→ Track title.

To change the default display mode, press the MP3 display mode ● Track title mode displays the track title of the
AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE MP3/WMA file.
appears on the display, then rotate the knob to To change the text displayed when listening to an
select the following display modes: MP3/WMA CD with MP3/WMA text (when CD ● Artist title mode displays the artist title of the
with text is being used), press the DISP button. MP3/WMA file.
Type A, B and E: Disc number ←→ Folder The DISP button will scroll through the CD text as
number. ● Folder title mode displays the folder name
follows:
given to the MP3/WMA folder.
Type C and D: Disc title ←→ Track number ←→ Type A, B, C and D: Track title ←→ Artist
Track title. Display satellite radio display mode (if so
title ←→ Folder title.
equipped)
Once the display mode is selected, press the Type E: Track title ←→ Folder title ←→ Artist title
AUDIO knob again to store the setting. If the To change the text displayed when listening to
←→ Disc number ←→ Folder number.
AUDIO knob is not pressed within 8 seconds, the satellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISP
display will refresh with the last selected display To change the default display mode, press the button. The DISP button will scroll through the
mode setting. AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE broadcast information as follows: Name ←→
● Disc number mode displays the current disc appears on the display, then rotate the knob to Title ←→ Current display mode.
number playing in the changer. select the following display modes:
To change the default display mode press the
● Folder number mode displays the selected Type A, B and E: Disc number ←→ Folder AUDIO button to display mode and press the
folder number and the track number that is number. TUNE button to select the following display
currently being played. modes: Channel number ←→ Channel name
Type C and D: Disc number ←→ Folder number
←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode is
● Disc title mode displays the title of the CD ←→ Track title ←→ Artist title ←→ Folder title.
selected press the AUDIO button again to store
being played. Once a display mode is selected, press the AU- the setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressed
● Track number mode displays the number DIO knob again to store the setting. after 8 seconds the display will refresh with the
selected disc and the track that is currently last selected display mode setting.
● Disc number mode displays the selected
being played on the disk. disc number and the track number that is ● Channel number mode displays the channel
● Track title mode displays the title of the se- currently being played. number of the selected satellite radio sta-
lected CD track. tion.
● Folder number mode displays the selected
folder number and the track number that is ● Channel name mode displays the channel
currently being played. name of the selected satellite radio station.

● Name mode displays the name of the artist, compact disc will automatically be turned off and If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO
host or weather condition of the selected the last radio station played will come on. button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-
satellite radio station. matically be turned off and the last radio station
The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during
● Title mode displays the song title, show played will come on.
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
name, or temperature of the selected satel- signal is weak, the radio will automatically change The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during
lite radio station. from stereo to monaural reception. FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
FM/AM/SAT radio operation signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
FM/AM/SAT band select (Type A, D and E
from stereo to monaural reception.
FM/AM/SAT band select (Type B and C only):
only): TUNE/FOLDER·CAT
Pressing the RADIO button will change the band
as follows: button (Type A, B, C and
Pressing the FM, AM, FM/AM or SAT radio select
button will change the band to either FM, AM or AM ←→ FM or SAT* (satellite, if so equipped) D only):
SAT (satellite - if so equipped) radio stations.
When the RADIO button is pressed while the Manual tuning
When the FM, AM, FM/AM or SAT* radio select ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the To manually tune the radio, press the
radio will come on at the station last played.
ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button or , or
last played. The last station played will also come on when turn the tuning knob to right or left.
The last station played will also come on when the POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressed
ON. To move quickly through the channels, press and
the POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressed
hold either the or button down for
ON. *No satellite radio reception is available and “NO more than 1.5 seconds.
*No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT” is displayed when the RADIO button is
pressed to access satellite radio stations unless CAT FOLDER (tuning)
SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is
pressed unless optional satellite receiver and optional satellite receiver and antenna are in- button (Type E only):
antenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio stalled and an XMா satellite radio service sub-
service subscription is active. Satellite radio is scription is active. Satellite radio is not available Manual tuning
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. To manually tune the radio, press the CAT
If a compact disc is playing when the FM, AM, FOLDER button or , or turn the tun-
FM/AM or SAT radio select button is pressed, the ing knob to right or left.

To move quickly through the channels, press and period will stop scan tuning and the radio will Radio data system (RDS):
hold either the or button down for remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPT
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
more than 1.5 seconds. button is not pressed within 5 seconds, scan
information service transmitted by some radio
tuning moves to the next station.
SEEK/TRACK button: stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-
PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera- rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
Seek tuning tions): many stations are now considering broadcasting
RDS data.
Press the SEEK/TRACK button or 18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT
for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low (satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C RDS can display:
or low to high frequencies and stop at the next preset button in any combination of FM, AM or
● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
broadcasting station. SAT stations.
● Station name, such as “The Groove”.
To seek quickly through the channels, press and 1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using the
hold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5 PRESET A·B·C select button. ● Music or programming type such as “Clas-
seconds. When the button is released the radio sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station
will seek to the next broadcasting station.
band. ● Artist and song information.
SCAN tuning (Type C only):
3. Tune to the desired station using manual, If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad- SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any RDS icon is displayed.
casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
SCAN button again during this 5 second period 6) until a beep sound is heard. Compact disc (CD) changer operation
will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not 4. The channel indicator will then come on and
pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the sound will resume. Programming is now position and press the LOAD or button,
the next station. complete. then press one of the CD insert slots (1 – 6) .
Insert the compact disc into the slot with the label
SCAN RPT tuning (Type A, B and D only): 5. Other buttons can be set in the same man- side facing up. The compact disc will be guided
ner. automatically into the slot and start playing.
Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5
seconds to stop at each broadcasting station If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
(AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds. opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
Pressing the button again during this 5 second case, reset the desired stations.

If the system has been turned off while the com- CD button (Type B, C and E only): back through tracks. The compact disc will go
pact disc was playing, pressing the back the number of times the button is pressed.
When the CD button is pressed with the system
POWER/VOLUME or PWR/VOL control knob
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will When the button is pressed while the
will start the compact disc.
turn on and the compact disc will start to play. compact disc is playing, the next track will start to
LOAD button (Type A, B, C and D only): play from its beginning. Press several times to
When the CD button is pressed with the com- skip through tracks. The compact disc will ad-
To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio vance the number of times the button is pressed.
LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select will automatically be turned off and the compact (When the last track on the compact disc is
the loading slot by pressing a CD insert select disc will start to play. skipped through, the first track will be played.)
button (1 – 6), then insert the CD. CD·DVD button (Type A and D only): TUNE/FOLDER·CAT
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press the Press the CD·DVD button to toggle the radio button (Type A, B, C and
LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds. between CD and DVD modes.
D only):
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the When the CD·DVD button is pressed with the
display when CDs are loaded into the changer. system off and the compact disc loaded, the CD:
system will turn on and the compact disc will start ● While playing a CD, press and hold the
LOAD button (Type E only):
to play.
TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button or
To insert a CD in the CD changer, press When the CD·DVD button is pressed with the to fast forward or rewind a track on a CD.
the button for less than 1.5 seconds. Se- compact disc loaded with the radio playing, the
lect the loading slot by pressing a CD insert radio will automatically be turned off and the MP3 CD:
select button (1 – 6), then insert the CD. compact disc will start to play. ● While playing an MP3 CD, press the
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press and For more information on the DVD system see TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button or
hold the button for more than 1.5 seconds. “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” later in this to scan backward or forward through avail-
section. able folders.
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the
display when CDs are loaded into the changer. SEEK/TRACK button: ● Press and hold the TUNE/FOLDER·CAT
button or to fast forward or re-
When the button is pressed while a com- wind a track on an MP3 CD.
pact disc is playing, the track being played re-
turns to its beginning. Press several times to skip

CAT FOLDER button ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT REAR ON·OFF (if so equipped):
→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISC
(Type E only): Pressing the REAR ON·OFF button for less than
RPT 1.5 seconds turns the rear seat audio controller
CD: ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated. on. REAR CONT ON will display. Pressing it
1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will again will turn the rear seat audio controller off.
● While playing a CD press the CAT FOLDER REAR CONT OFF will display. If the vehicle is not
be repeated.
button or to fast forward or re- 1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing equipped with a rear seat audio controller, the
wind a track on a CD. will be repeated display will show “REAR AV N/A”.
MP3 CD: ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be (SPEAKER CONTROL) button
played randomly (Type A and D only):
● While playing an MP3 CD, press the CAT 1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-
FOLDER button or to scan rently playing will be played randomly Press the button to turn the rear speakers
backward or forward through available fold- off and the headphones on. Press the but-
RPT RDM button (Type C only):
ers. ton again to turn rear seat speakers back on and
When the RPT RDM play button is pressed while the headphones off.
● Press and hold the CAT FOLDER
the compact disc is played, the play pattern can CD EJECT:
button or to fast forward or re- be changed as follows:
wind a track on an MP3 CD.
ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT Current/Selected disc:
CD select buttons: → ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISC
RPT ● Press the button, then press the slot
To play another CD that has been loaded, press a number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The
CD select button (1 – 6). ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated. compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-
1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loaded
SCAN/RPT button (Type A, B, D and E be repeated.
only): disc will be ejected. If the ejected disc is not
1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing removed within 15 seconds, the disc will
When the SCAN/RPT play button is pressed will be repeated reload.
while the compact disc is played, the play pattern ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be
can be changed as follows: played randomly
1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-
rently playing will be played randomly

All discs:
● Press and hold the button for more
than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be
ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed
within 20 seconds or the button is
pressed again during the eject sequence,
the entire disc eject sequence will be can-
celed.
When this button is pressed while a compact
disc is playing, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
CD IN indicator:
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs WHA0869 LHA0049
have been loaded into the changer in CD mode AUX jack (if so equipped) CD CARE AND CLEANING
only.
The AUX jack ᭺ is located below the air condi-
1
● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack accepts disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
any standard analog audio input such as from a
portable cassette tape player, MP3 player or a ● Always place the discs in the storage case
laptop computer. when they are not being used.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device ● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
when it is plugged into the AUX jack. center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.


● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

WHA0611 WHA0612
Type A Type B
1. Volume control switch 1. Volume control switch
2. MODE select switch 2. Phone operation switch
3. POWER on/off switch 3. Power on and MODE select switch
4. Tuning switch 4. Tuning switch


STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR Volume control switch Change disc (CD):
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped) Push the volume control switch up or down to Push the tuning switch or for more
The audio system can be operated using the increase or decrease the volume. than 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up
controls on the steering wheel. or down.
Tuning
POWER on/off switch
Memory change (radio):
If you have the Type A switch, with the ignition
switch placed in the ACC or ON position, push While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,
the POWER switch to turn the audio system on B or C), push the tuning switch or
or off. for less than 1.5 seconds to change to the next
preset station in memory.
If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition
switch placed in the ACC or ON position, push Seek tuning (radio):
the MODE switch to turn the audio system on.
Push the tuning switch or for more
MODE select switch than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous
radio station.
Push the mode select switch to change the mode
in the following sequence: PRESET A → PRE- Next/Previous track (CD):
SET B → PRESET C → CD* → DVD** (if so
equipped) → AUX***. Push the tuning switch or for less
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
*This mode is only available when a CD is loaded. present track or skip to the next track. Push
**This mode is only available when a DVD is several times to skip back or skip through tracks.
loaded into the DVD player. This system searches for the blank intervals be-
***This mode is only available when a compatible tween selections. If there is a blank interval within
auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack. 1 program or there is no interval between pro-
grams, the system may not stop in the desired or
expected location.


REAR AUDIO CONTROLS (if so
equipped)
The headphones symbol illuminates on the front
display when the rear audio controls are on. Two
headphone jacks are provided so two rear seat
passengers may listen to the audio system pri-
vately.
The rear volume controls can only increase the
volume to the level at which the front radio volume
control is set.
One or two infrared headphones are included if
the vehicle is equipped with the DVD entertain-
ment system. Most portable radio headphones
work with the rear audio controls.
VOL (volume) button:
(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

Press this button to turn the rear speakers
off and headphones on. Press this button
again to turn rear seat speakers back on and
LHA0322
headphones off.
1. VOL (volume) control button 7. Infrared headphone transmitter lens*
2. MODE select button
3. speaker control button *Red transmitters will be visible when
4. NEXT button infrared headphones are on.
5. SEEK button
6. Headphone jacks

NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM (MES) (if so equipped)

MODE button: To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna clock-
wise. Tighten the antenna rod to specification
The MODE button allows the rear passengers to using a suitable tool such as an open-end
change between AM, FM, CD, DVD and AUX. wrench. The antenna rod tightening specification
The media options are listed on the face plate of is 3.4 – 3.6 N·m (30 – 32 in-lb). Do not use pliers
the rear audio controls. When a source of media to tighten the antenna as they can leave marks on
is selected, the media label will be illuminated. the antenna surface. The antenna rod cannot be
SEEK button: hand tightened to the proper specification.
In AM or FM mode, the SEEK button allows the CAUTION
rear seat passengers to find the next radio station
up or down the station band frequency. Always properly tighten the antenna rod
during installation or the antenna rod may
In CD mode, the SEEK button allows the rear break during vehicle operation.
passengers to find the next or previous selection
on the CD. LHA0389

NEXT button: WARNING
When the NEXT button is pressed while in AM or ● The Mobile Entertainment System is
FM mode, the radio will change to the next preset. designed for rear seat passenger view-
ing only.
The NEXT button does not function while in SAT
radio mode or when playing a DVD or CD. ● The driver must not attempt to operate
the Mobile Entertainment System while
ANTENNA the vehicle is in motion so that full at-
The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be tention may be given to vehicle
removed. When you need to remove the antenna, operation.
turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.


CAUTION
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mer-
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.
● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaning
the Mobile Entertainment System com-
ponents. Do not use solvents or clean-
ing solutions.
Do not attempt to use the system in extreme LHA0316
temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or
1. EJECT button DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYER
above 158°F (70°C)].
2. DVD slot CONTROLS
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, do not 3. ENTER button
operate the system more than 15 minutes without Refer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” later
4. POWER on/off button
starting the engine. in this section for the function of each button.
5. MODE button
6. Input jacks
7. STOP button
8. PLAY/PAUSE button
9. MENU button
10. DISPLAY button
11. NAVIGATION keys


6. DISPLAY button
7. MODE button
8. SUBTITLE button
9. AUDIO button
10. ANGLE button
11. CLEAR button
12. PAUSE button
13. PLAY button
14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE
button
15. MENU button
16. NAVIGATION keys
17. BACK button
LHA0315
18. NUMERIC KEYPAD
REMOTE CONTROL FLIP-DOWN SCREEN
The flip-down screen has a wireless remote con-
Refer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” later
trol receiver ᭺ located at the bottom of the
1
in this section for the function of each button.
screen.

LHA0317
1. POWER button
2. STOP button
3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and PREVI-
OUS TRACK/CHAPTER button
4. TITLE button
5. ENTER button

CAUTION
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
sharp object. If the glass screen breaks,
do not touch it. Doing so could result in
an injury.
● The screen rotates down to view and up
into the housing to store when not in
use. Ensure that the screen is latched
securely into the housing when stored.

SAA0720 SAA0721

Headphones NOTE:

Power ON/OFF: For optimum infrared headphone perfor-
mance, increase the volume on the rear
Press the power button to turn the headphones seat controller to the maximum level and
on or off. adjust the infrared headphone volume us-
ing the volume control on the headphones.
Volume control:
Using a lower volume setting on the rear
Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol- seat controller can cause static noise in the
ume. infrared headphones.
The headphones will automatically be turned off
in 30 seconds if there is no sound during that
period. To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, keep the power supply turned off when
not in use.


PLAYING A DIGITAL VIDEO DISC Press the REAR ON·OFF button located on the
CAUTION
(DVD) front controls to disable or enable rear seat audio
controls. For more information on rear seat audio Do not force the compact disc into the
controls see, “Rear Audio Controls” earlier in this slot. This could damage the player.
CAUTION
section. MODE select button:
● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle
engine is running. Operating the DVD Pressing the button on the front controls Press the MODE button to select Audio/Video
for extended periods of time with the turns the rear speakers on or off and enables or source between DVD and AUX input (input jacks
engine OFF can discharge the vehicle disables the wireless headphones . on the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,
battery. White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =
It is possible to operate the DVD player by remote
● Do not allow the system to get wet. control. Video input).
Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-
Headphones are a wireless type and no cables The display will show the “AUX” in the upper left
uids may cause the system to
malfunction. are necessary. You can use them in almost all the corner of the display for 4 seconds once the
ranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to use Mode is changed to AUX.
The driver must not attempt to wear the head- the headphones in the front seat.) To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary input
phones while the vehicle is in motion so that full
POWER on/off button: jacks” in this section.
attention may be given to vehicle operation.
With the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON or PLAY:
While playing video CD media, this DVD player
does not guarantee complete functionality of all position, press the POWER button to turn the
DVD player on or off. When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player or
video CD formats.
the PLAY button on the remote control is
With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos, Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side pressed, the player will play.
video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen- facing up. The DVD will be guided automatically
gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde- into the slot. In play mode, the display will briefly show
pendently of the front seat. on the upper left corner of the display.
If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, the
Press the CD·DVD button located on the front DVD player will automatically turn on.
controls to hear the sound of the DVD play
through the speakers.


FF (Fast Forward), REW or PAUSE: The display will show the EJECT symbol in
the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds
(Remote control only):
When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player or once the EJECT button is pressed.
Press the FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE the PAUSE button on the remote control is If the DVD is not loaded, the display will show
buttons to carry out the fast forward or fast re- pressed, the player will pause playing of the “NO DISC”.
verse presentation at 5 times normal play speed. media. In pause mode, the player will show If the DVD comes out and is not removed within
Press the FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE on the upper left corner of the display until the 25 seconds, it will be pulled back into the slot to
buttons again or PLAY button to resume the player is changed to another mode. protect it.
normal play speed. STOP: DISPLAY:
NEXT If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2
CHAPTER/PREVIOUS Press the STOP button once to stop playing the seconds, the display menu will appear on the
media. The display will show in the upper screen.
CHAPTER (Remote con-
left corner of the display for 4 seconds, and the
trol only): last disc position will be stored. When the PLAY ● The display menu will remain on the screen
for 10 seconds if no subsequent control
button is pressed again, it will resume at the
When the (NEXT CHAPTER) button is activations occur.
stored disc track and time position.
pressed while the DVD is playing, the program ● Use the NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate
next to the present one will start to play from its If the STOP button is pressed again when the within the display menu and use ENTER to
beginning. Press several times to skip through player is already in Stop mode, it will reinitialize select the item.
programs. The DVD will advance the number of the pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect,
it will ignore the last stored disc position and ● Holding the DISPLAY control on the face-
times the button is pressed. When the plate for longer than approximately 2 sec-
upon receipt of the next play message, will begin
(PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is pressed, the onds while in the display menu will reset the
at the Title Menu or at “the beginning of the disc”.
program being played returns to its beginning. display characteristics to their nominal val-
Press several times to skip back through pro- EJECT: ues. (Faceplate feature only)
grams. The DVD will go back the number of times
the button is pressed. When the EJECT button is pressed with the DVD
loaded, it will be ejected.


If the DISPLAY control button on the faceplate is If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATION SUBTITLE (Remote control only):
pressed for more than 2 seconds, the media KEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,
Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitle
track/time information will be displayed along the and Right within the menu.
selection menu.
bottom of the display. Pressing the DISPLAY
ENTER:
control for more than 2 seconds will remove the Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cycle
media track/time information from the display. In MENU mode, press the ENTER button to se- through each available subtitle.
(Faceplate feature only) lect MENU items.
AUDIO (Remote control only):
NAVIGATION KEYS: In the display menu, press the ENTER button to
Press the AUDIO button to call up the audio
select items for modification, as per the on-
If media is in PLAY mode, activation of the NAVI- menu.
screen instructions.
GATION KEYS (Up, Down, Left, and Right) will
Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cycle
perform the following functions: next MENU:
through each available audio track.
chapter/track, previous chapter/track, fast re-
If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENU
verse and fast forward, and the display will ANGLE (Remote control only):
button is pressed, the DVD menu will appear on
show , , and respec- the screen. Use the Navigation Keys to navigate Press the ANGLE button to call up the camera
tively in the upper left corner of the display for 4 within the menu and use ENTER to select the angle menu.
seconds. (Faceplate feature only) item.
Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle
If media is in PAUSE mode, activation of the Press the MENU button again to return to PLAY through each available angle.
NAVIGATION KEYS (Up, Down and Right) will mode.
CLEAR (Remote control only):
perform the following functions: next TITLE (Remote control only):
chapter/track, previous chapter/track and slow Press the CLEAR button to clear all numeric
Press the TITLE button to return the DVD media inputs, if actuated prior to expiration of the
forward, and the display will show , to the “title” of the DVD.
and a forward arrow symbol respectively in the 3-second timer.
upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds. Press the TITLE button again to return to the NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10) (Remote
(Faceplate feature only) previous stop point and play.
control only):
If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI- BACK (Remote control only):
Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access
GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up, Press the BACK button to exit the current active disc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting their
Down, Left, and Right within the menu. menu and return to the previous menu. numeric value.

Use the “≥10” button to input numbers greater To view the compatible device connected to the
than or equal to 10. Up to three digits can be AUX jacks, press the MODE button. For more
inputted when selecting the chapter/title/track information, see “Mode select button” earlier in
number. this section.
The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will CARE AND MAINTENANCE
continuously shift the previously input number to
the “left”. Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean the
surfaces of your NISSAN Mobile Entertainment
The chapter/title/track number will be automati- System (DVD player face, screen, remote control,
cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if etc.).
3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.
Do not attempt to use the system in extreme
The operator can cancel the input temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or
chapter/title/track number by actuating the above 158°F (70°C)].
CLEAR control prior to the expiration of the
Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme LHA0049
3-second timer.
humidity conditions (less than 10% or more than HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD
These functions can be used only for the DVD 75%).
discs which correspond to them.
CAUTION
Auxiliary input jacks CAUTION
● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touch
● Do not use any solvents or cleaning the surface of the disc.
The auxiliary input jacks are located on the control
solutions when cleaning the video
panel. Compatible devices such as video games, ● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
system.
camcorders and portable video players can be the center to the outer edge using a
connected to the auxiliary jacks. ● Do not use excessive force on the moni- clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
tor screen. using a circular motion.
The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-
tion purposes. ● Avoid touching or scratching the moni- ● Do not use a conventional record
tor screen as it may become dirty or
● Yellow - video input damaged.
cleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-
tended for industrial use.
● White - left channel audio input
● Red - right channel audio input

● A new disc may be rough on its inner ● DVDs with a region code other than
and outer edges. Remove the rough “1”. The region code ᭺ is displayed in
A
edges using the side of a pen or pencil a small symbol printed on the top of
as illustrated. the DVD ᭺.B

● Never attempt to use a DVD that has ● DVDs that are not round.
been cracked, deformed, or repaired
● DVDs with a paper label.
using adhesive. Doing so may cause
damage to the equipment. ● DVDs that are warped, scratched, or
have unequal edges.
● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-
nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may not ● Recordable digital video discs
be read properly. (DVD+R).
● Do not write, draw or attach anything on any ● Rewritable digital video discs
side of the DVD. (DVD+RW).
● Do not store the DVD in locations with direct If a DVD with a paper label is used and
sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity. becomes jammed, you may be able to reset
● Always place discs in the storage case when the unit and eject the jammed disc with the
they are not being used. following procedure:
● Do not put on any sticker or write anything 1. Record the radio presets.
on either surface of the DVD.
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from
LHA0484 the battery for five minutes.
DVD player operation precautions 3. Reconnect the negative battery termi-
nal.
Do not use the following DVDs as they may
cause the DVD player to malfunction: 4. Check to see if the jammed DVD has
been ejected. If it has not, try to eject
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter.
the DVD by pushing the eject button.


5. If the disc cannot be ejected see your
NISSAN dealer for further assistance.
6. Re-program the radio presets.

LHA0318 SAA0723

Remote control and headphones If the battery is removed for any reason
battery replacement other than replacement, close the lid se-
curely.
Replace the battery as follows:
● If you will not be using the remote control for
1. Open the lid. long periods of time, remove the batteries.
2. Replace batteries with new ones. ● Replacement of the batteries is needed
when the remote control only functions at
● Size AA (remote control)
extremely close distances to the DVD player
● Size AAA (headphones) or not at all.

Make sure that the and ends on ● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.
the batteries match the markings inside the ● An improperly disposed battery can harm
compartment. the environment. Always confirm local regu-
3. Close the lid securely. lations for battery disposal.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

● When changing batteries, do not let dust or When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
CAUTION
oil get on the remote control and head- your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
phones. precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may ● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
adversely affect the engine control system and sible from the electronic control
FCC Notice: modules.
other electronic parts.
Changes or modifications not expressly ap- ● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
proved by the party responsible for compli- WARNING (20 cm) away from the electronic con-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
● A cellular telephone should not be used trol system harnesses. Do not route the
erate the equipment. This device complies antenna wire next to any harness.
for any purpose while driving so full
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210
attention may be given to vehicle op- ● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit the as recommended by the manufacturer.
the following two conditions: (1) This de-
use of cellular telephones while driving.
vice may not cause harmful interference, ● Connect the ground wire from the CB
and (2) this device must accept any inter- ● If you must make a call while your ve- radio chassis to the body.
ference received, including interference hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
that may cause undesired operation of the lar phone operational mode (if so ● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
device. equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-
ercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.


BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (if so equipped)

WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.

WHA0878
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com- your cellular phone in the vehicle.
patible Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-
can set up the wireless connection between your
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can
matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

module when the ignition switch is placed in the – Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it ● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
ON position with the paired cellular phone turned from being dialed. regarding the telephone charges, cellular
on and carried in the vehicle. phone antenna and body, etc.
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
You can register up to 5 different Bluetoothா or ambient sound is too loud, it may be REGULATORY INFORMATION
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone ing a call. FCC Regulatory information
at a time. – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone surrounded by metal or far away from the FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
System, refer to the following notes. in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
quality degradation and wireless connection modification, or attachments could damage
● Set up the wireless connection between a the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
disruption.
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone tions.
module before using the hands-free phone ● While a cellular phone is connected through
system. the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat- – Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
● Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா 1. This device may not cause interference and
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
phone module. Please visit 2. this device must accept any interference,
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom- cellular phones. including interference that may cause unde-
mended phone list and pairing. ● If the hands-free phone system seems to be sired operation of the device.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide” IC Regulatory information
phone under the following conditions: later in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble- – Operation is subject to the following two con-
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser- shooting help. ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
vice area. ence, and (2) this device must accept any
● Some cellular phones or other devices may interference, including interference that may
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is cause interference or a buzzing noise to cause undesired operation of the device.
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking – This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
ing the device in a different location may
garage, near a tall building or in a moun- quirements of the Canadian Interference-
tainous area. reduce or eliminate the noise. Causing Equipment Regulations.

Operating tips ● If a command is not recognized, the system
BLUETOOTH௡ is a announces, “Command not recognized.
trademark owned by To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Please try again.” Repeat the command in a
Bluetooth SIG, Inc., Voice Recognition system, observe the following: clear voice.
U.S.A. and licensed ● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as ● If you want to go back to the previous com-
to Visteon. possible. Close the windows to eliminate mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
tion” any time the system is waiting for a
USING THE SYSTEM sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
response.
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a ● You can cancel a command when the sys-
hands-free operation of the Bluetoothா Phone command. Otherwise, the command will not tem is waiting for a response by saying,
System. be received properly. “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may ● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
not be available so full attention may be given to also press the button on the steering
after the tone sounds.
vehicle operation. wheel at any time. Whenever the VR session
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing is cancelled, a double beep is played to
Initialization between words. indicate you have exited the system.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON Giving voice commands ● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, feedback, press the volume control switches
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
which takes a few seconds. When completed, (+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
the amber light on the overhead console illumi- and release the button located on the provided with feedback. You can also use
nates and the system is ready to accept voice steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a the radio volume control knob.
command.
commands. If the button is pressed before ● In most cases you can interrupt the voice
the initialization completes, the system will an- The command given is picked up by the micro-
feedback to speak the next command by
nounce “Hands-free phone system not ready” phone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted. pressing the button on the steering
and will not react to voice commands.
wheel.
● If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.

● To speed the operation you can say multiple ● Numbers can be spoken in small groups. Example: 1-555-1212 *123
commands. For example, press the The system will prompt you to continue en-
– “One five five five one two one two star
button then say “Phonebook, New entry” tering digits, if desired. one two three”
rather than “Phonebook.” Wait for the voice Example: 1-800-662-6200
feedback prompt then say “New entry”. NOTE:
– “One eight zero zero”
How to say numbers For best results, say phone numbers as
The system repeats the numbers and single digits.
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain prompts you to enter more.
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer The voice command “Help” is available at any
to the following rules and examples. – “six six two” time. Please use the “Help” command to get
information on how to use the system.
● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”. The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “six two zero zero”
– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or ● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-
able when using the “Call International”
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh command and the “Send” command during
oh” a call).
● Words can be used for the first 4 digits ● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
places only. the “Call International” command).
Example: 1-800-662-6200 ● Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (available
only when storing a phone book number).
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”, ● You can say “star” for “*” and “pound” for “#”
at any time in any position of the phone
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty number (available only when using “Call In-
two hundred, and ternational” command).
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two See “List of voice commands” and “Interna-
hundred. tional” in this section for more information.

3. Press the button.
PHONE/END
For information on speaker adaptation, see
Press the button to cancel a VR “Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” later in this
session or end a call. section.
GETTING STARTED 4. The system announces the current language
The following procedures will help you get and gives you the option to change the lan-
started using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad- French). Use the following chart to select
ditional command options, refer to “List of voice the language.
commands” in this section.
NOTE:
Choosing a language
You must press the button or
WHA0879 You can interact with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free
Phone System using English, Spanish or French. the button within 5 seconds to
CONTROL BUTTONS change the language.
To change the language, perform the following.
The control buttons for the Bluetoothா Hands- Press Press
Current
Free Phone System are located on the steering 1. Press and hold the button for more (PHONE/SEND) (PHONE/END)
language
wheel. than 5 seconds. to select to select
PHONE/SEND 2. The system announces: “Press the English Spanish French
Spanish English French
Press the button to initiate a VR PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the French English Spanish
session or answer an incoming call.
speaker adaptation mode or press the 5. If you decide not to change the language, do
PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif- not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
You can also use the button to ferent language.” VR session will end, and the language will
skip through system feedback and to not be changed.
enter commands during a call. See “List
of voice commands” and “During a call”
later in this section for more information.

Pairing procedure 4. Say: “New phone” ᭺. The system acknowl-
C refer to “Setup” later in this section for more
edges the command and asks you to initiate information on changing priorities.
NOTE: pairing from the phone handset ᭺.
D
7. The system will ask if you would like to select
The pairing procedure must be performed The pairing procedure of the cellular phone a custom ring tone ᭺. Follow the instruc-
G
when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle varies according to each cellular phone tions provided by the system or refer to
starts moving during the procedure, the model. See the cellular phone Owner’s “Setup” later in this section for more infor-
procedure will be cancelled. Manual for details. You can also visit mation on selecting ringtones.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-
Main Menu tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel- Making a call by entering a phone
“Setup” ᭺
A lular phones. number
“Pair phone” ᭺
B When prompted for a Passkey code, enter Main Menu
“New phone” ᭺ “1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
C
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and “Call” ᭺
A
Initiate from handset ᭺
D cannot be changed. Number (speak digits) ᭺
B
Name phone ᭺
E
5. The system asks you to say a name for the “Dial” ᭺
C
Assign priority ᭺
F phone ᭺.
E
1. Press the button on the steering
Choose ringtone ᭺
G If the name is too long or too short, the wheel. A tone will sound.
system tells you, then prompts you for a
1. Press the button on the steering name again. 2. Say: “Call” ᭺. The system acknowledges
A
wheel. The system announces the available the command and announces the next set of
commands. Also, if more than one phone is paired and available commands.
the name sounds too much like a name
2. Say: “Setup” ᭺. The system acknowledges
A already used, the system tells you, then Say: “Call International” to dial more than 10
the command and announces the next set of prompts you for a name again. digits or any special characters.
available commands.
6. The system asks you to assign a priority level 3. Say the number you wish to call starting with
3. Say: “Pair phone” ᭺. The system acknowl-
B ᭺. The priority level determines which
F the area code in single digit format ᭺. If the
B
edges the command and announces the phone is active when more than one paired system has trouble recognizing the correct
next set of available commands. Bluetoothா phone is in the vehicle. Follow phone number, try entering the number in
the instructions provided by the system or the following groups: 3-digit area code,

3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex- For additional command options, see “List of If you want to go back to the previous command,
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five voice commands” later in this section. you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two the system is waiting for a response.
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than When you get used to the menus in the system,
Main Menu you can talk ahead by saying more than one
10 digits or any special characters, say “In-
ternational”. See “How to say numbers” in “Call” or “Call International” command at a time. For example, say, “Call five
this section, for more information. “Phone Book” five five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”
4. When you have finished speaking the phone “Memo Pad” Also, when you get used to the system re-
number, the system repeats it back and an- sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone by
“Setup”
nounces the available commands. pressing the button on the steering wheel.
5. Say: “Dial” ᭺. The system acknowledges
C When you press and release the button on However, if you press the button when the
the command and makes the call. the steering wheel, you can choose from the system is waiting for a response from you it will
commands on the Main Menu. The following end the VR session.
For additional command options, see “List of pages describe these commands and the com-
voice commands” in this section. “Call”
mands in each sub-menu.
Receiving a call Remember to wait for the tone before Main Menu
When you hear the ring tone, press the speaking. “Call” or “Call International”
button on the steering wheel. You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands Name (speak name) ᭺
A

Once the call has ended, press the button currently available any time the system is waiting Number (speak digits) ᭺
B
for a response.
on the steering wheel. “Redial” ᭺
C

NOTE:
If you want to end an action without completing it, “Call Back” ᭺
D
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the
If you do not wish to take the call when you system is waiting for a response. The system will Name (speak name) ᭺
A
hear the ring tone, press the button end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is
If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you
on the steering wheel. cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
can dial a number associated with a name and
you have exited the system.
location.


See “Phone book” later in this section to learn If a redial number does not exist, the system ● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
how to store entries. announces, “There is no number to redial” and “Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
ends the VR session. to the call.
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system “Call back” ᭺
D ● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
acknowledges the name. Use the Call Back command to dial the number of command to enter numbers, “*” or “#” during
the last incoming call within the vehicle. a call. For example, if you were directed to
If there are multiple locations associated with the
dial an extension by an automated system:
name, the system asks you to choose the loca- The system acknowledges the command, re-
tion. peats the number and begins dialing. Say: “Send one two three four.”
Once you have confirmed the name and location, If a call back number does not exist, the system The system acknowledges the command
the system begins the call. announces, “There is no number to call back” and and sends the tones associated with the
ends the VR session. numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-
Number (speak digits) ᭺
B
sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,
International
When prompted by the system, say the number Say “pound” for “#”.
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers” For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
characters, please say “international”. When the ● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-
and “Making a call by entering a phone number”
system acknowledges the command, the system mand to transfer the call from the Bluetoothா
in this section for more details.
will prompt you to speak the number. Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular
“Redial” ᭺
C phone when privacy is desired.
During a call
Use the Redial command to call the last number The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
that was dialed within the vehicle. During a call there are several command options transferred to privacy mode.” The system
available. Press the button on the steering then ends the VR session.
NOTE: wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-
You can also issue the Transfer Call com-
mands.
The system will not redial the last number mand again to return to a hands-free call
dialed by the handset keypad. ● “Help” — The system announces the avail- through the vehicle.
able commands.
The system acknowledges the command, re- ● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
peats the number and begins dialing. ● “Go back/Correction” — The system an- your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session Use the mute command again to unmute
and returns to the call. your voice.

NOTE: NOTE: Enter a phone number by voice command:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone Each phone has its own separate phone For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
network connection is lost while the Mute book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone See “How to say numbers” in this section for
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset book if you are currently connected with more information.
to “off” for the next call so the other party Phone B.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
can hear your voice. “New entry” ᭺
A
phone’s memory:
“Phone book” Use the New Entry command to store a new Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
name in the system. the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
NOTE: from the phone handset. The new contact phone
When prompted by the system, say the name you
Phone book commands are not available would like to give the new entry. number will be transferred from the cellular
when the vehicle is moving. For example, say: “Mary.” phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.

Main Menu If the name is too long or too short, the system The transfer procedure varies according to each
tells you, then prompts you for a name again. cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
“Phone Book”
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name Manual for details. You can also visit
“New Entry” ᭺
A www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
“Edit” ᭺
B you for a name again. on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
“Delete” ᭺
C
Once the system accepts the name and you
recommended cellular phones.
“List Names” ᭺
D confirm it is correct, the system asks for a location The system repeats the number and prompts you
(Home, Office, Mobile or Other). for the next command. When you have finished
The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
phone paired with the system. Each name can For example, say: “Home.”
“Store.”
have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ- The system acknowledges the location.
ated with it. The system confirms the name, location and
The system will ask you to say a phone number or
number. The system then asks if you would like to
to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory. store another location for the same name. If you
do not wish to store another location, the system
ends the VR session.


“Edit” ᭺
B The transfer procedure varies according to each If a redial number or a call back number exists, the
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s system deletes them without asking for confirma-
Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone
Manual for details. You can also visit tion.
book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
number to an existing entry. If there is no number for the entry you are trying to
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
delete, the system says so and ends the VR
When prompted by the system, say the name of recommended cellular phones.
session.
the entry you wish to edit.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
“List names” ᭺
D
The system acknowledges the name and asks for the next command. When you have finished
you for the location you would like to edit. entering numbers, choose “Store.” Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
Say the name of the location. The system confirms the name, location and
number, then announces that the entry has been The system recites the phone book entries but
The system acknowledges the location.
stored. The system then ends the VR session. does not include the actual phone numbers.
The system will ask you to say a phone number or When the playback of the list is complete, the
“Delete” ᭺
C
to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular system goes back to the main menu.
phone’s memory. Use the Delete command to erase one entry from
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
the phone book, all entries from the phone book,
Enter a phone number by voice command: by pressing the button on the steering
the current redial number or the current call back
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.” number. wheel. The system ends the VR session.
See “How to say numbers” in this section for “Memo pad”
To delete entries from the phone book, say a
more information.
name or “All entries” when prompted by the sys-
Main Menu
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular tem.
phone’s memory: “Memo Pad”
The system acknowledges the command and
“Record” ᭺
A
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges asks you to confirm the deletion.
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer “Play” ᭺
B
To delete the current redial number or call back
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number, say “redial number” or “call back num- “Delete” ᭺
C
number will be transferred from the cellular
ber” when prompted by the system. The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.
memos, each up to 20 seconds long.

“Record” ᭺
A “Setup” Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair a
sixth phone, the system announces that you must
The system announces “Recording” and a tone Main Menu first delete one phone or replace an existing
sounds, signaling you to begin.
“Setup” phone.
Speak the information you wish to record clearly. “Pair Phone” ᭺
A If you try to pair a phone that has already been
When you are done, press the or “List Phone” ᭺
B paired to your vehicle’s system, the system an-
button on the steering wheel. nounces the name the phone is already using.
“Select Phone” ᭺
C
A tone sounds and the system announces The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.
“Change Priority” ᭺
D
“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end When prompted by the system, choose from the
the VR session. “Delete Phone” ᭺
E
following commands:
“Select Ringtone” ᭺
F
If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wish ● “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing proce-
to record over the oldest memo. “Bluetooth Off” ᭺
G
dure” in this section.
“Play” ᭺
B Use the Setup command to change options as- ● “Replace phone” — The system announces
sociated with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone the names of the phones already paired and
The system plays back all the memos in the order System.
of newest to oldest. The system ends the VR asks which you would like to replace.
session. “Pair phone” ᭺
A
Once you say the name of the phone you
If there are no memos recorded, the system an- Use the Pair Phone command to pair a compat- wish to replace, the pairing procedure will
nounces “No messages to play.” The system ible phone to the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone begin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” in this
ends the VR session. System. section.

“Delete” ᭺
C NOTE: ● “List phone” – See the description below.

The Delete command erases all memos. The The pairing procedure must be performed “List phone” ᭺
B

system asks you to confirm this action before when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle Use the List Phone command to hear the names
deleting all memos. starts moving during the procedure, the of the phones currently paired. If no phones are
procedure will be cancelled. Also, see
paired, the system announces, “No paired
“Pairing procedure” in this section for ad-
phones to list.” The system then ends the VR
ditional information.
session.

“Select phone” ᭺
C For example, if the current priority levels are: “Select ringtone” ᭺
F

Use the Select Phone command to select a Priority Level 1 = Phone A Use the Select Ringtone command to select the
phone of lesser priority when two or more phones Priority Level 2 = Phone B tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is
paired with Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone Sys- Priority Level 3 = Phone C received.
tem are in the vehicle at the same time.
and you change the priority level of Phone C to The system announces the name of the active
The system asks you to name the phone and Level 1, then: phone and asks you to choose from the following
confirm the selection. commands:
Priority Level 1 = Phone C
Once the selection is confirmed, the selected Priority Level 2 = Phone B ● “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone
phone remains active until the ignition switch is Priority Level 3 = Phone A and asks if you would like to select that tone.
placed in the OFF position or you select a new If you say “No”, the system plays the next
“Delete phone” ᭺
E
phone. ringtone available and continues to cycle
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a through the ringtones until you select one or
“Change priority” ᭺
D
specific phone or all phones from the Bluetoothா quit.
Use the Change Priority command to change the Hands-Free Phone System.
● “Silent” — The system asks you to confirm
priority level of the active phone.
The system announces the names of the phones your wish to disable the ringtone.
The priority level determines which phone is ac- already paired with the system and their priority
“Bluetooth off” ᭺
G
tive when more than one paired Bluetoothா level. The system then gives you the option to
phone is in the vehicle. delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to the Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the
list again. Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System.
The system states the priority level of the active
phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5). Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones, When the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone Sys-
the system asks you to confirm this action. tem is off, you will not be able to make or receive
If the new priority level is already being used for
calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, you
another phone, the two phones will swap priority NOTE: will not have access to the Phone Book.
levels.
When you delete a phone, the associated You can still use the Memo Pad and access
phone book for that phone will also be Setup.
deleted.


SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE hands-free phone system to enter the The SA mode will stop if:
speaker adaptation mode or press the
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of- ● The button is pressed for more than 5
PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-
dialect users to train the system to improve rec- seconds in SA mode.
ferent language.”
ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of ● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.
commands, the users can create a voice model of 5. Press the button.
their own voice that is stored in the system. The ● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
system is capable of storing a different speaker For information on selecting a different lan- LOCK position.
adaptation model for memory A and memory B. guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier in
this section. Training phrases
If memory A is available, the system will use During the SA mode, the system instructs the
memory A to store the model. If memory A is in 6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected
automatically. If both memory locations are trainer to say the following phrases. (The system
use and memory B is available, the system will will prompt you for each phrase.)
use memory B to store the model. If both of the already in use, the system will prompt you to
memory locations are in use, the system will ask overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro- ● phone book new entry
the user to select which memory location should vided by the system.
● dial three oh four two nine
be overwritten. 7. When preparation is complete and you are
● delete call back number
Training procedure ready to begin, press the button.
● setup pair phone
The procedure for training a voice is as follows. 8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system. ● memo pad play
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location. 9. When training is finished, the system will tell ● eight pause nine three two pause seven
you an adequate number of phrases have ● delete all entries
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run- been recorded.
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis- ● call seven two four zero nine
sion in P (Park). 10. The system will ask you to say your name.
Follow the instructions to register your ● phone book delete entry
3. Press and hold the button for more name.
than 5 seconds. ● memo pad record
11. The system will announce that speaker ad-
4. The system announces: “Press the ● dial star two one seven oh
aptation has been completed and the sys-
PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the tem is ready. ● Yes

● No ● setup main menu
● select ring tone ● Delete
● dial eight five six nine two ● dial nine seven two six six
● Bluetooth on ● memo pad delete
● setup change priority ● call seven six three oh one
● call three one nine oh two ● go back

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight ● call five six two eight zero

● Cancel ● dial six six four three seven

● call back number
● call star two zero nine five
● delete phone
● dial eight three zero five one
● Home
● four three pause two nine pause zero
● delete redial number
● phone book list names
● call eight oh five four one
● Correction
● setup change ring tone
● dial seven four oh one eight


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” in this section.
phone book.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
On-pavement and off-road driving Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Using four wheel drive (4WD)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Engine protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING

WARNING ● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are ● The exhaust system and body should be
entering the vehicle, drive with all win- inspected by a qualified mechanic
dows fully open, and have the vehicle whenever:
inspected immediately.
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets a. The vehicle is raised for service.
should also not be left alone. They ● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
could accidentally injure themselves or such as a garage.
entering into the passenger
others through inadvertent operation of ● Do not park the vehicle with the engine compartment.
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, running for any extended length of time.
temperatures in a closed vehicle could c. You notice a change in the sound of
quickly become high enough to cause ● Keep the rear vent windows, lift gates, the exhaust system.
severe or possibly fatal injuries to doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
d. You have had an accident involving
people or animals. closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
damage to the exhaust system, un-
gases could be drawn into the passen-
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or ger compartment. If you must drive with
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
straps to help prevent it from sliding or one of these open, follow these
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than THREE-WAY CATALYST
precautions:
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- The three-way catalyst is an emission control
lision, unsecured cargo could cause 1. Open all the windows.
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
personal injury.
2. Set the air recirculation but- gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) ton to off and the fan control dial to high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
high to circulate the air.
WARNING ● If electrical wiring or other cable con- WARNING
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
nections must pass to a trailer through ● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
the seal on the lift gate or the body, tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
contain colorless and odorless carbon
follow the manufacturer’s recommen- or flammable materials away from the
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en- exhaust system components.
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or
try into the vehicle.
death.

5-2 Starting and driving

● Do not stop or park the vehicle over ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
flammable materials such as dry grass, DRIVING PRECAUTIONS SYSTEM (TPMS)
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
CAUTION They have higher ground clearance than passen-
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
ger cars to make them capable of performing in a
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
from leaded gasoline will seriously re- tires of a different size than the size indicated on
This gives them a higher center of gravity than
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground
help reduce exhaust pollutants. you should determine the proper tire inflation
clearance is a better view of the road, allowing
pressure for those tires.)
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- you to anticipate problems. However, they are not
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or designed for cornering at the same speeds as As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
electrical systems can cause overrich conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, than low-slung sports cars are designed to per- (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at when one or more of your tires is significantly
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
able loss of performance or other un- with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
usual operating conditions are this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
detected. Have the vehicle inspected or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
promptly by a NISSAN dealer. person is significantly more likely to die than a cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
person wearing a seat belt. heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
level. Running out of fuel could cause Be sure to read the driving safety precautions
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
the engine to misfire, damaging the later in this section.
ability.
three-way catalyst.
● Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.

Starting and driving 5-3

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for Additional information: ● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, ● The TPMS does not monitor the tire
and the outside temperature. Low outside
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to pressure of the spare tire.
temperature can lower the temperature of
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure ● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle the air inside the tire which can cause a
telltale. is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a km/h). Also, this system may not detect a the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a nate. If the warning light illuminates in low
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal- flat tire while driving). ambient temperature, check the tire pres-
function indicator is combined with the low tire sure for all four tires.
● The low tire pressure warning light does not
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
automatically turn off when the tire pressure ● You can also check the pressure of all tires
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously is adjusted. After your tires are inflated to the (except the spare tire) on the display screen.
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon recommended pressure, the vehicle must be The order of the tire pressure figures dis-
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) played on the screen does not correspond
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire with the actual order of the tire position. See
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure “Tire pressure information” in the “Display
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS gauge to check the tire pressure. screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, phone systems” section.
● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap-
including the installation of replacement or alter-
pears in the vehicle information display when ● The Tire and Loading Information label (also
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the low tire pressure warning light is illumi- referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac- nated and low tire pressure is detected. The inflation pressure label) is located in the
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off driver’s door opening.
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and when the low tire pressure warning light
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function turns off.
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
properly. ● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
does not appear if the low tire pressure (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS
malfunction.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel Some examples are:
WARNING
is replaced, tire pressure will not be – Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
● If the low tire pressure warning light
indicated, the TPMS will not function frequencies are near the vehicle.
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
and the low tire pressure warning light
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, – If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road being used in or near the vehicle.
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as – If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
possible for tire replacement and/or DC/AC converter is being used in or near the
inflated tires may permanently damage
system resetting. vehicle.
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage ● Replacing tires with those not originally FCC Notice:
could occur and may lead to an acci- specified by NISSAN could affect the
dent and could result in serious per- proper operation of the TPMS. For USA:
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol This device complies with Part 15 of the
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to tire sealant into the tires, as this may FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
the recommended COLD tire pressure cause a malfunction of the tire pressure lowing two conditions:
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- sensors.
tion label to turn the low tire pressure 1. This device may not cause harmful in-
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, terference, and
replace it with a spare tire as soon as CAUTION
2. This device must accept any interfer-
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case Do not place metalized film or any metal ence received, including interference
of emergency” section for changing a parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This that may cause undesired operation.
flat tire.) may cause poor reception of the signals Note: Changes or modification not ex-
from the tire pressure sensors, and the pressly approved by the party respon-
TPMS will not function properly. sible for compliance could void the us-
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily er’s authority to operate the
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and equipment.
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
minate.


For Canada: avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under 4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed
following two conditions:
as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-
1. This device may not cause interfer- supplemental restraint system” section of this hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle
ence, and manual, and also instruct your passengers to do speed is reduced.
so.
2. This device must accept any interfer- 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
ence, include interference that may Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli- steering wheel until both tires return to the
cause undesired operation of the de- sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an road surface. When all tires are on the road
vice. unbelted or improperly belted person is surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-
significantly more likely to be injured or propriate driving lane.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND killed than a person properly wearing a ● If you decide that it is not safe to return the
ROLLOVER seat belt. vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the
WARNING vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe If the right side or left side wheels unintentionally
and prudent manner may result in loss of leave the road surface, maintain control of the RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
control or an accident. vehicle by following the procedure below. Please Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
note that this procedure is only a general guide. if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma- tires.
neuvers, because these driving practices could 1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a 2. Do not apply the brakes. and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
collision with other vehicles or objects or 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel speeds.
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if with both hands and try to hold a straight
the loss of control causes the vehicle to course.
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain- 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect with both hands and try to hold a straight you must choose not to drive under the influence
the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and course. of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel- though the local laws vary on what is considered
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain
control of the vehicle by following the procedure 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location affects all people differently and most people
below. Please note that this procedure is only a off the road and away from traffic if possible. underestimate the effects of alcohol.
general guide. The vehicle must be driven as Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
appropriate based on the conditions of the ve- that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-
stop the vehicle.
hicle, road and traffic. scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-
WARNING either contact a roadside emergency service hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat
The following actions can increase the tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
chance of losing control of the vehicle if this manual.
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-
collision and result in personal injury. ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for
DRIVING leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-
● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in hicle.
the direction of the flat tire. WARNING
Remember that two-wheel drive models are less
● Do not rapidly apply the brakes. Never drive under the influence of alcohol capable than four-wheel drive models for rough
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
● Do not rapidly release the accelerator road driving and extrication when stuck in deep
duces coordination, delays reaction time snow or mud, or the like.
pedal.
and impairs judgement. Driving after
● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel. drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
1. Remain calm and do not over react. yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.


Please observe the following precautions: ● If your engine stalls or you cannot make ● Before operating the vehicle, ensure
it to the top of a steep hill, never at- that the driver and all passengers have
WARNING tempt to turn around. Your vehicle their seat belts fastened.
● Drive carefully when off the road and could tip or roll over. Always back
● Lower your speed when encountering
avoid dangerous areas. Every person straight down in R (Reverse) gear and
strong crosswinds. With a higher center
who drives or rides in this vehicle apply brakes to control your speed.
of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-
should be seated with their seat belt ● Heavy braking going down a hill could fected by strong side winds. Slower
fastened. This will keep you and your cause your brakes to overheat and fade, speeds ensure better vehicle control.
passengers in position when driving resulting in loss of control and an acci-
over rough terrain. ● Do not drive beyond the performance
dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low
capability of the tires, even with 4WD
● Do not drive across steep slopes. In- gear to control your speed.
engaged.
stead drive either straight up or straight ● Unsecured cargo can be thrown around
down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can ● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-
when driving over rough terrain. Prop-
tip over sideways much more easily tempt to raise two wheels off the
erly secure all cargo so it will not be
than they can forward or backward. ground and shift the transmission to
thrown forward and cause injury to you
any drive or reverse position with the
● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. or your passengers.
engine running. Doing so may result in
If you drive up them, you may stall. If ● Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-
you drive down them, you may not be far forward and as low as possible. Do hicle movement which could result in
able to control your speed. If you drive not equip the vehicle with tires larger serious vehicle damage or personal
across them, you may roll over. than specified in this manual. This injury.
● Do not shift gears while driving on could cause your vehicle to roll over
downhill grades as this could cause ● Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
loss of control of the vehicle. steering wheel when driving off-road.
● Stay alert when driving to the top of a The steering wheel could move sud-
hill. At the top there could be a drop-off denly and injure your hands. Instead
or other hazard that could cause an drive with your fingers and thumbs on
accident. the outside of the rim.


IGNITION SWITCH

● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped ● Always use tires of the same type, size, WARNING
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,
(such as the dynamometers used by ● Never remove the ignition key or place
or radial), and tread pattern on all four
some states for emissions testing), or the ignition switch in the LOCK position
wheels. Install tire chains on the rear
similar equipment even if the other two while driving. The steering wheel will
wheels when driving on slippery roads
wheels are raised off the ground. Make lock (for models without NISSAN ve-
and drive carefully.
sure you inform test facility personnel hicle immobilizer system). This may
● Be sure to check the brakes immedi- cause the driver to lose control of the
that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD
ately after driving in mud or water. See vehicle and could result in serious ve-
before it is placed on a dynamometer.
“Brake system” later in this section for hicle damage or personal injury.
Using the wrong test equipment may
“Wet brakes”.
result in drivetrain damage or unex-
pected vehicle movement which could ● Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
result in serious vehicle damage or per- hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it
sonal injury. rolls forward, backward or sideways,
you could be injured.
● Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
maneuvers or sudden braking may ● Whenever you drive off-road through
cause loss of control. sand, mud or water as deep as the
wheel hub, more frequent maintenance
● If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
may be required. See “Periodic mainte-
maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.
nance” in the “NISSAN Service and
Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle
Maintenance Guide.”
has a higher center of gravity than a
passenger car. The vehicle is not de-
signed for cornering at the same
speeds as passenger cars. Failure to
operate this vehicle correctly could re-
sult in loss of control and/or a rollover
accident.


To remove the key from the ignition switch: The shift selector can be moved if the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position and the
1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) posi- foot brake pedal is depressed.
tion with the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion. There is an OFF position between the
LOCK and ON positions. The OFF position
2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- is indicated by a “1” on the ignition switch.
tion. For models without NISSAN vehicle immo-
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch. bilizer system: when the ignition switch is
in the OFF position, the steering wheel is
If the shift selector is shifted to the P (Park) not locked.
position after the ignition switch is placed in the
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
OFF position or when the ignition switch cannot
must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise
be placed in the LOCK position, proceed as from the straight up position.
follows to remove the key.
WSD0041
To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park) to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To
position. unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
The ignition lock is designed so the ignition and turn it gently while rotating the steer-
switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position 2. Place the ignition switch slightly toward the
ON position. ing wheel slightly right and left.
and the key cannot be removed until the shift
selector is moved to the P (Park) position. 3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-
tion, turn the steering wheel to the left or
When removing the key from the ignition switch, tion.
right while turning the key to unlock the
make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park) 4. Remove the key. key cylinder.
position.
The shift selector is designed so it cannot move
If the shift selector is not returned to P (Park)
out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear
position, the ignition switch cannot be placed in
the LOCK position. positions if the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position or if the key is removed from the
switch.


BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

KEY POSITIONS 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position ● Make sure the area around the vehicle is
for approximately 5 seconds. clear.
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK ● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
OFF: (Not used) (1) position, and wait approximately 10 sec- ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid
ACC: (Accessories) (2) onds. as frequently as possible, or at least when-
ever you refuel.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
This position activates electrical accessories
● Check that all windows and lights are clean.
such as the radio when the engine is not running. 4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference) ● Visually inspect tires for their appearance
ON: Normal operating position (3) separate from the registered key. and condition. Also check tires for proper
This position turns on the ignition system and the inflation.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
electrical accessories. ommends placing the registered key on a sepa- ● Check that all doors are closed.
START: (4) rate key ring to avoid interference from other
● Position seat and adjust head restraints.
devices.
This position starts the engine. As soon as the ● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
engine has started, release the key. It automati-
cally returns to the ON position. ● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER ● Check the operation of warning lights when
SYSTEM (if so equipped) the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion. See “Warning/indicator lights and au-
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
dible reminders” in the “Instruments and
allow the engine to start without the use of the
controls” section of this manual.
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedures:

STARTING THE ENGINE DRIVING THE VEHICLE

1. Apply the parking brake. cranking the engine, release the accel- ENGINE PROTECTION MODE
erator pedal. Crank the engine with your
2. Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N foot off the accelerator pedal by turn- The engine has an engine protection mode to
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. ing the ignition key to START. Release the reduce the chance of damage if the coolant tem-
key when the engine starts. If the engine perature becomes too high (for example, when
The shift selector cannot be moved out
starts, but fails to run, repeat the above climbing steep grades in high temperature with
of P (Park) and into any of the other
procedure. heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer).
gear positions if the ignition switch is When the engine temperature reaches a certain
turned to the OFF position or if the key level:
is removed from the ignition switch. CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than ● The engine coolant temperature gauge will
The starter is designed not to operate if move toward the H position.
the shift selector is in any of the driving 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
positions. not start, turn the key off and wait 10 ● Engine power may be reduced.
seconds before cranking again, otherwise
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the the starter could be damaged. ● The air conditioning cooling function may be
accelerator pedal by placing the ignition automatically turned OFF for a short time
switch in the START position. Release the 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec- (the blower will continue to operate).
key when the engine starts. If the engine onds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate Engine power and, under some conditions, ve-
starts, but fails to run, repeat the above
speed for a short distance first, especially in hicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed can be
procedure.
cold weather. controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the
● If the engine is very hard to start in ex- vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed.
tremely cold weather or when restarting, In cold weather, keep the engine running for The transmission will downshift or upshift as it
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap- a minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting it reaches prescribed shift points. You can also
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a shift manually.
and then crank the engine. Release the short period of time may make the vehicle
more difficult to start. As driving conditions change and engine coolant
key and the accelerator pedal when the
temperature is reduced, vehicle speed can be
engine starts.
increased using the accelerator pedal, and air
● If the engine is very hard to start because conditioning cooling function will automatically
it is flooded, depress the accelerator be turned back ON.
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. After

If: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING
1. The engine coolant temperature is not re- Overheating can result in reduced engine
duced. WARNING
power and vehicle speed. The reduced
2. The air conditioning cooling function does speed may be lower than other traffic, ● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
which could increase the chance of a col- while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
not turn back ON.
lision. Be especially careful when driving. tral) to R (Reverse), or L (Low). Always
3. The engine oil pressure low/engine coolant If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv- depress the brake pedal until shifting is
temperature high warning light illumi- ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a completed. Failure to do so could cause
nates, this may indicate a malfunction. Move safe area. Allow the engine to cool and you to lose control and have an
the vehicle off the road in a safe area and return to normal operation. See “If your accident.
allow the engine to cool. If after checking the vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer- ● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
gency” section of this manual. caution when shifting into a forward or
oil and coolant, the remains on, do not
continue to drive and call a NISSAN dealer. reverse gear before the engine has
CAUTION warmed up.
The malfunction indicator light (MIL) may also
come ON. If only it remains on, you do not need
Running the engine with the engine oil ● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
pressure warning light on could cause se- while the vehicle is moving. This could
to have your vehicle towed, but have it inspected
rious damage to the engine almost imme- cause an accident.
soon by a NISSAN dealer. See “Malfunction in- diately. Such damage is not covered by
dicator light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con- warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it ● Except in an emergency, do not shift to
trols ” section of this manual. is safe to do so. the N (Neutral) position while driving.
Doing so can cause a loss of engine
braking which may result in a collision,
serious personal injury or death. In ad-
dition, coasting with the transmission
in the N (Neutral) position may cause
serious damage to the transmission.


The automatic transmission is designed so
CAUTION
the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed
● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill before shifting from P (Park) to any drive
grade, do not hold the vehicle by de- position while the ignition switch is in the
pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot ON position.
brake should be used for this purpose.
The shift selector cannot be moved out of
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery the P (Park) position and into any of the
roads. This may cause a loss of control. other gear positions if the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK or OFF position.
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is
electronically controlled to produce maximum
power and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
WSD0187
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment. To move the shift selector:
Starting the vehicle : Shift while depressing the brake pedal
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the : Shift without depressing brake pedal
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
selector out of the P (Park) position. Shifting – console
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
move the shift selector into a driving gear. pedal and move the shift selector out of the P
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start (Park) position.
the vehicle in motion.


R (Reverse): 4H:
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift selec- 62 MPH (100 km/h)
CAUTION
tor is in any position while the engine is 4LO:
not running. Failure to do so could cause To prevent transmission damage, use the
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when 31 MPH (50 km/h)
away and result in serious personal injury the vehicle is completely stopped.
3 (Third gear):
or property damage Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make Use this position for driving up and down long
If the key is turned to the OFF position for any sure the vehicle is completely stopped before slopes where engine braking would be advanta-
reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any D selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake geous.
(Drive) position, the key cannot be turned to the pedal must be depressed to move the shift
selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any 2 (Second gear):
LOCK position and be removed from the ignition
switch. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) drive position to R (Reverse). Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-
position, then the key can be turned to LOCK. N (Neutral): ing on downhill grades.
P (Park): Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
over the following and do not exceed the follow-
engine can be started in this position. You may
CAUTION ing speeds in the 2 position.
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
To prevent transmission damage, use the while the vehicle is moving. 2WD and AUTO:
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
D (Drive): 71 MPH (115 km/h) w/o tow mode
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use this position for all normal forward driving. 62 MPH (100 km/h) w/tow mode
Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. 4 (Fourth gear): 4H:
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. 62 MPH (100 km/h) w/o tow mode
Use this position for driving up and down long
The brake pedal should be depressed to
slopes where engine braking would be advanta-
move the shift selector from N (Neutral) or 62 MPH (100 km/h) w/tow mode
geous.
any drive position to P (Park). Apply the
parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the Do not downshift into the 4 position at speeds
parking brake first, then move the shift selector over the following and do not exceed the follow-
into the P (Park) position. ing speeds in the 4 position.

4LO:
WARNING
31 MPH (50 km/h) w/o tow mode Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-
27 MPH (44 km/h) w/tow mode tor is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could cause
1 (Low gear): the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly away and result in serious personal injury
or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud, or property damage.
or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill
If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for
grades.
any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any
Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turned to the
over the following and do not exceed the follow- LOCK position and be removed from the ignition
ing speeds in the 1 position. switch. Move the shift selector to the P (Park)
2WD and AUTO: position, then the key can be turned to LOCK.
LSD0099
To move the shift selector: P (Park):
43 MPH (70 km/h) w/o tow mode
37 MPH (60 km/h) w/tow mode : Shift while depressing the brake pedal CAUTION
4H: : Shift without depressing brake pedal To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
43 MPH (70 km/h) w/o tow mode
Shifting – column the vehicle is completely stopped.
37 MPH (60 km/h) w/tow mode
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the
4LO: pedal and move the shift selector out of the P vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.
19 MPH (30 km/h) w/o tow mode (Park) position. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal should be depressed to
16 MPH (27 km/h) w/tow mode move the shift selector from N (Neutral) or
any drive position to P (Park). Apply the
parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the
parking brake first, then move the shift selector
into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse): M4 (Fourth):
For driving up or down long slopes where engine
CAUTION
braking would be advantageous.
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
the vehicle is completely stopped. M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make M4 will be displayed on the position indicator in
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before the meter.
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed to move the shift M3 (Third):
selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill
drive position to R (Reverse).
grades.
N (Neutral):
WSD0188 Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The Manual shift mode
engine can be started in this position. You may M1 ←→ M2 ←→ M3
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine When the manual shift mode button ᭺ is A M3 will be displayed on the position indicator in
while the vehicle is moving. pressed while driving, the transmission enters the the meter.
D (Drive): manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected
M2 (Second):
manually.
Use this position for all normal forward driving. Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-
grades.
played on the position indicator in the meter. After
pressing the manual shift mode button, the posi- Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
tion indicator first displays M4 (Fourth)
M1 ←→ M2
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
M2 will be displayed on the position indicator in
M1←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4←→D the meter.


M1 (First): When canceling the manual shift mode:
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly Press the manual shift mode button ᭺ to return
A
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or the transmission to the normal driving mode.
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep
● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
downhill grades.
sion may not shift to the selected gear
M1 will be displayed on the position indicator on immediately because of vehicle speed.
the meter. The transmission will up or down shift
when vehicle speed matches the pro-
● Remember not to drive at high speeds for
grammed transmission shift points.
extended periods of time in lower than M4
This helps maintain driving perfor-
range. This reduces fuel economy.
mance and reduces the chance of ve-
When shifting up: hicle damage or loss of control.
Move the shift selector to the + (up) side. (Shifts ● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
LSD0090
to higher range.) sion will not up shift to a higher gear
than is manually selected. When the Console shift
When shifting down: vehicle speed decreases, the transmis- Shift lock release
Move the shift selector to the Ϫ (down) side. sion automatically shifts down and
shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle If the battery is discharged, the shift selector may
(Shifts to lower range.)
comes to a stop. not be moved from the P (Park) position even with
● The transmission will automatically down- the brake pedal depressed.
shift the gears. (For example, if you select the
To move the shift selector, release the shift lock.
3rd range, the transmission will shift down
The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral).
between the 3rd and 1st gears.)
However, for models without the NISSAN vehicle
● Moving the shift selector rapidly to the same immobilizer system, the steering wheel will be
side twice will shift the ranges in succession. locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved
if the battery is discharged.


5. Use a protective cloth on the end of a small Accelerator downshift
screwdriver before inserting it in the shift — in D position —
lock release slot and pushing down.
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-
6. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral) erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-
position while holding down the shift lock sion down into a lower gear, depending on the
release. vehicle speed.
7. For models without the NISSAN vehicle im- Fail-safe
mobilizer system, turn the key to the ON
position to unlock the steering wheel. When the fail-safe operation occurs, please note
that the transmission will be locked in any of the
8. Now the vehicle may be moved to the de- forward gears according to the condition.
sired location.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-
LSD0101
If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto- and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
Column shift
matic transmission system as soon as possible. system may be activated. This will occur
To push the shift lock release, complete the fol- even if all electrical circuits are functioning
lowing procedure: WARNING properly. In this case, turn the ignition
1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position switch OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then
If the shift selector cannot be moved from turn the ignition switch back to the ON
and remove the key the P (Park) position while the engine is position. The vehicle should return to its
2. Apply the parking brake. running and the brake pedal is depressed, normal operating condition. If it does not
the stop lights may not work. Malfunction- return to its normal operating condition,
3. On vehicles equipped with a column shifter, ing stop lights could cause an accident have a NISSAN dealer check the transmis-
tilt the steering wheel down to the lowest injuring yourself and others. sion and repair it if necessary.
position.
4. Remove the shift lock release cover as
shown.


PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

WARNING
● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
● Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
● Do not use the shift selector in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
● Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident. LSD0158 LSD0159
To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake. 1. ACCEL/RES switch
To release: 2. COAST/SET switch
3. CANCEL switch
1. Firmly apply the foot brake. 4. ON·OFF switch
2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi- PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
tion.
CONTROL
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it
will release. ● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The SET indicator
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light in the vehicle information display then
light goes out. blinks to warn the driver, see “Vehicle infor-
mation display” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section.


● If the SET indicator light blinks, push the CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS ● Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both the
cruise control ON·OFF switch off and have CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. The cruise control allows driving at a speed be- light in the vehicle information display go out.
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
● The SET indicator light may blink when the keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. The cruise control is automatically canceled and
cruise control ON·OFF switch is pushed ON the SET light in the vehicle information display
while pushing the ACCEL/RES, To turn on the cruise control, push the goes out if:
COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To prop- ON·OFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the vehicle information display will illuminate. ● you depress the brake pedal while pushing
erly set the cruise control system, use the
the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.
following procedures. To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to The preset speed is deleted from memory.
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
WARNING and release it. The SET indicator light in the ● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
vehicle information display will illuminate. Take (13 km/h) below the set speed.
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions: your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle ● you move the shift selector to N (Neutral).
maintains the set speed.
● When it is not possible to keep the To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
vehicle at a set speed. ● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- of the following three methods.
celerator pedal. When you release the
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously ● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
speed. set speed. vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
● On winding or hilly roads. release the COAST/SET switch.
● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). when going up or down steep hills. If this ● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
happens, drive without the cruise control. When the vehicle attains the speed you de-
● In very windy areas. sire, release the switch.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle following three methods. ● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
control and result in an accident. Each time you do this, the set speed in-
● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
light in the vehicle information display goes
out.
● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light
goes out.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one ● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
CAUTION
of the following three methods. cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), position.
● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve- follow these recommendations to obtain
hicle attains the desired speed, push the maximum engine performance and en- ● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
COAST/SET switch and release it. sure the future reliability and economy of Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re- your new vehicle. Failure to follow these ● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to recommendations may result in short- Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-
the desired speed. ened engine life and reduced engine
hicles.
performance.
● Push and release the COAST/SET switch. ● Use a proper gear range which suits road
Each time you do this, the set speed de- ● Avoid driving for long periods at constant
conditions. On level roads, shift into high
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm. gear as soon as possible.
To resume the preset speed, push and re-
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re- ● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. ● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
turns to the last set cruising speed when the
● Avoid quick starts. ● Keep your engine tuned up.
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
● Avoid hard braking as much as possible. ● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts ● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
could be damaged. sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
● Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.


USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD) (if so equipped)

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
WARNING CAUTION
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag. ● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at- ● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO
tempt to raise two wheels off the position on dry hard surface roads. Driv-
● For vehicles equipped with , use 4H ground and shift the transmission to ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO
or 4L position only when necessary. Four- any drive or reverse position with the may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear
wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy. engine running. Doing so may result in and increased fuel consumption.
drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-
If the 4WD warning light turns on when
hicle movement which could result in
you are driving on dry hard surface
serious vehicle damage or personal
roads:
injury.
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift
● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped
switch to 2WD.
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer
(such as the dynamometers used by – in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,
some states for emissions testing), or move the shift selector to the N (Neu-
similar equipment even if the other two tral) position with the brake pedal
wheels are raised off the ground. Make depressed, and shift the 4WD shift
sure you inform test facility personnel switch to 2WD.
that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD
● If the warning light is still on after the
before it is placed on a dynamometer.
above operation, have your vehicle
Using the wrong test equipment may
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
result in drivetrain damage or unex-
possible.
pected vehicle movement which could
result in serious vehicle damage or per-
sonal injury.


TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING
PROCEDURES
The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions
(2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the desired
drive mode according to the driving conditions.
2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD Shift Indicator Light
Wheels Driven Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure
Switch Position 4WD shift Transfer 4LO position
Move the 4WD switch.
For driving on dry, paved roads (Economy 2WD <—> 4H
Rear wheels 4WD shift indicator light will indicate trans-
drive)
2WD fer shift position engaged.
IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE
SHIFT SELECT TO THE N POSITION IN
For driving on rocky, sandy or snow-covered
4 wheels THIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS OP-
roads
ERATION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.
4H
Neutral Neutral disengages the automatic transmis- 1. Stop the vehicle.
sion mechanical parking lock, which will 2. With the brake pedal depressed, move
allow the vehicle to roll. Do not leave the the shift selector to the N position.
*1
transfer shift position in Neutral.*2 3. With the brake pedal depressed, de-
May blink
press and turn the 4WD shift switch to
4LO or 4H.
THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT EN-
4LO 4 wheels For use when maximum power and traction GAGE BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO
is required (for example: on steep grades or TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST
Illuminated rocky, sandy, muddy roads) STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSED
THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE
SHIFT SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL. *3

*1: Before moving the shift selector from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completed
and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind,
not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.


- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.
1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch ЉOFFЉ.
2. Start the engine.
- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
3. Apply the parking brake, depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector to Neutral position.
4. With the brake pedal depressed, move the 4WD shift switch to desired mode.
- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift selector from Neutral position.
*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator
lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.
*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also turn on when
4LO is selected. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” later in this section.


The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to ● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
CAUTION
select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry
driving conditions. There are three types of drive ● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-
hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause
modes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO. tween 4LO and 4H while driving.
unnecessary noise and tire wear.
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the ● The 4H position provides greater trac- NISSAN recommends driving in the
transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will 2WD position under these conditions.
cause increased fuel consumption and
move between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO. ● The 4WD transfer case may not be
higher oil temperatures, and could
shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-
To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle damage drivetrain components.
bient temperatures and the transfer
MUST be stationary, shift the shift selector Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H is
4LO position indicator light may blink
to neutral, and depress the brake pedal. not recommended.
even when the 4WD shift switch is
The switch must be pushed and turned to ● The 4LO position provides maximum shifted. After driving for a while you can
select 4LO. power and traction. Avoid raising ve- change the 4WD transfer case between
hicle speed excessively, as the maxi- 4H and 4LO.
WARNING mum speed is approximately 31 MPH
(50 km/h). When driving on rough roads,
● When parking, apply the parking brake
before stopping the engine and make ● When driving straight, shift the 4WD ● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position. ● Drive carefully according to the road surface
on and the ATP warning light goes off. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when
Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect- conditions.
making a turn or reversing.
edly move even if the automatic trans- When the vehicle is stuck,
mission is in the P position. ● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-
tween 2WD and 4H) while driving on ● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.
● The 4LO indicator light must stop blink- steep downhill grades. Use the engine
ing and remain illuminated or turn off brake and low automatic transmission ● Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential
before shifting the transmission into gears (D1 or D2) for engine braking. (E-Lock) system (if so equipped). Turn the
gear. If the shift selector is shifted from switch ON while the vehicle is stationary and
the “N” position to any other gear when ● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch apply the throttle to try to free the vehicle.
the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the (between 2WD and 4H) with the rear
vehicle may move unexpectedly. wheels spinning.


● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the ● When the vehicle is stopped after mak-
vehicle back and forth between reverse and ing a turn, you may feel a slight jolt
drive gears. after the shift selector is shifted to N or
P. This occurs because the transfer
● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place
clutch is released and not because of a
stones or wooden blocks under the tires.
malfunction.
Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire
chains may be effective.
CAUTION
CAUTION ● When driving straight, shift the 4WD
shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.
● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires
Do not move the 4WD shift switch when
will sink deep into the mud, making it
making a turn or reversing.
difficult to free the vehicle.
● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while
● Avoid shifting gears with the engine
LSD0145 driving on steep downhill grades. Use
running at high speeds as this may
the engine brake and low automatic
cause malfunction. 4WD shift switch operations transmission gears (D1 or D2) for en-
● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the gine braking.
2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on ● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch
driving conditions. with the rear wheels spinning.
● If the 4WD shift switch is operated ● Before placing the 4WD shift switch in
while making a turn, accelerating or the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the
decelerating or if the key switch is vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH (100
turned off while in the 4H or 4LO, you km/h). Failure to do so can damage the
may feel a jolt. This is not abnormal. 4WD system.
● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-
tween 4LO and 4H while driving.


● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the The 4WD warning light comes on when the key
4WD indicator light goes out. switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the
engine is started.
CAUTION
If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system
● If the 4WD shift indicator light indica- when the key switch is ON, the warning light will
tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD either remain illuminated or blink.
shift switch is shifted to the 4H position
at low ambient temperatures, the 2WD If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD
mode may be being engaged due to shift indicator light goes out.
malfunctioning drive system. If the indi- A large difference between the diameters of front
cator does not return to normal and the
and rear wheels will make the warning light blink
4WD warning light comes on, have the
slowly (about once per two seconds). Change
system checked by the nearest NISSAN
dealer. the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive
LSD0147 fast.
4WD shift indicator light 4WD warning light
CAUTION
The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the
● If the warning light comes on or blinks
vehicle information display. Comes on or blinks
slowly during operation or rapidly after
Warning light
when:
The light should turn off within 1 second after stopping the vehicle for a while, have
turning the ignition switch to the ON position. your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
There is a mal- dealer as soon as possible.
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi- function in the
Comes on ● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not
cator light will illuminate the position selected by 4–wheel drive
the 4WD shift switch. system recommended when the 4WD warning
light turns on.
● The 4WD shift indicator light may blink Blinks
The difference in
while shifting from one drive mode to wheel rotation is
slowly
the other. When the shifting is com- large
pleted, the 4WD shift indicator light
will come on. The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR
DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
● When the warning light comes on, the The E-Lock system can provide additional trac-
WARNING
2WD mode may be engaged even if the tion and should only be used when a vehicle has
4WD shift switch is in 4H. Be especially become or is becoming stuck. This system oper- ● Never leave the E-Lock system ON
careful when driving. If corresponding ates by electronically “locking” the two rear drive when driving on paved or hard-surfaced
parts are malfunctioning, the 4WD wheels together, allowing them to turn at the roads. Turning the vehicle may result in
mode will not be engaged even if the same speed. The system is used when it is not the rear wheels slipping and result in an
4WD shift switch is shifted. possible to free a stuck vehicle even when using accident and personal injury. After us-
the 4LO position (4 wheel drive vehicles). ing the E-Lock system to free the ve-
● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO hicle, turn the system OFF.
position on dry hard surface roads. Driv- When added traction is required, activate the
ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO ● Use the E-Lock system only when free-
E-Lock system by pushing the switch ON. See ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position
may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-
and increased fuel consumption. before using the E-Lock system. Never
tem switch” in the “Instruments and Controls” use the E-Lock system on a slippery
If the 4WD warning light turns on when section. Once the system fully engages, the indi- road surface such as snow or ice sur-
you are driving on dry hard surface roads: cator light in the instrument panel will remain ON. face. Using the E-Lock system when
– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift When the system is activated, both rear wheels driving in these road conditions may
switch to 2WD. will engage, providing added traction. cause unexpected movement of the ve-
hicle during engine braking, accelerat-
– in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle, The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move to
ing or turning, which may result in an
move the automatic transmission engage the system, and the system will only
accident and serious personal injury.
shift selector to the N position with engage up to approximately 4 MPH (7 km/h).
the brake pedal depressed, and shift Once the vehicle is free, the system should be
the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. turned OFF and driving resumed.
● If the warning light is still on after the The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled
above operation, have your vehicle and the ABS light illuminates when the E-Lock
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control
possible.
(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light
● The transfer case may be damaged if illuminates when the E-Lock system is ON.
you continue driving with the warning
light blinking.


PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

CAUTION
● After using the E-Lock system, turn the
switch OFF to prevent possible damage
to driveline components from extended
use.
● Do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster
than 12 mph (20 km/h) when the system
is engaged. Doing so could damage
drivetrain components.
● Do not turn on the E-lock system while
the tires are spinning. Doing so could
damage drivetrain components.
WSD0050

WARNING ● Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass, ● Do not leave children unattended inside
waste paper or rags. They may ignite the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
and cause a fire. tivate switches or controls. Unattended
● Safe parking procedures require that ous accidents.
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Fail- 1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and re- 2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift tion.
selector has been pushed as far forward 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
as it can go and cannot be moved without traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
depressing the foot brake pedal.
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: ᭺
A The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic The brake system has two separate hydraulic
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you have braking at 2 wheels.
gently touches the curb. will still have control of the vehicle. However, BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
much greater steering effort is needed, especially
● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: ᭺
B
in sharp turns and at low speeds. Vacuum assisted brakes
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side WARNING The brake booster aids braking by using engine
wheel gently touches the curb. vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
If the engine is not running or is turned off vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO while driving, the power assist for the greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
CURB: ᭺
C steering will not work. Steering will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-
harder to operate. tance will be longer.
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
ter of the road if it moves. Using the brakes
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
tion. driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.


This procedure is described in the vehicle service – When installing a spare tire, make
WARNING
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN sure that it is the proper size and type
● While driving on a slippery surface, be dealer. as specified on the Tire and Loading
careful when braking, accelerating or
Information label. See “Tire and
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel- ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM Loading Information label” in the
erating could cause the wheels to skid (ABS) “Technical and consumer informa-
and result in an accident.
tion” section of this manual.
● If the engine is not running or is turned WARNING
– For detailed information, see
off while driving, the power assist for ● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
the brakes will not work. Braking will be sophisticated device, but it cannot pre- nance and do-it-yourself” section of
harder. vent accidents resulting from careless this manual.
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
Wet brakes help maintain vehicle control during The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the
When the vehicle is washed or driven through braking on slippery surfaces. Remem- brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your ber that stopping distances on slippery braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle surfaces will be longer than on normal The system detects the rotation speed at each
may pull to one side during braking. surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis- wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
tances may also be longer on rough, vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe gravel or snow covered roads, or if you preventing each wheel from locking, the system
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to are using tire chains. Always maintain a helps the driver maintain steering control and
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return safe distance from the vehicle in front helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon- pery surfaces.
speeds until the brakes function correctly. sible for safety.
● Tire type and condition may also affect Using the system
Parking brake break-in
braking effectiveness. Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the – When replacing tires, install the press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened specified size of tires on all four but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or wheels. ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
best brake performance.

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)
SYSTEM

Normal operation ● ABLS system uses automatic braking to
WARNING
transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5 the wheel on the same axle with more trac-
may result in increased stopping - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road tion. The ABLS system applies braking to
distances. conditions.
the slipping wheel, which helps redirect
Self-test feature When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are power to the other wheel.
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is ● On 4WD models the ABLS system operates
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You in both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD mode is
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a engaged, the ABLS system operates for
tests the system each time you start the engine noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from both drive axles. On 2WD vehicles, the
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or the actuator when it is operating. This is normal ABLS system operates on the drive axle
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. only.
a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake However, the pulsation may indicate that road ● The ABLS system is always ON. In some
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-
conditions, the system may automatically
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc- quired while driving.
turn the ABLS system off. If the system is
tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The automatically turned off, normal brake func-
brake system then operates normally, but without tion will continue. ABLS will function even
anti-lock assistance. when the VDC system is turned OFF.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the ● The ABLS does not operate if both wheels
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle on a drive axle are slipping.


VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
WARNING
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve- control of the vehicle, but it can not prevent loss
● The ABLS system helps provide in- hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, of vehicle control in all driving situations.
creased traction, but will not prevent the VDC System helps to perform the following
accidents due to abrupt steering opera- functions: When the VDC system operates, the indi-
tion or by careless driving or dangerous cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the
driving practices. Reduce vehicle speed ● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel following:
and be especially careful when driving slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
and cornering on slippery surfaces. Al- transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on ● The road may be slippery or the system may
ways drive carefully. the same axle. determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. ● Controls brake pressure and engine output
If suspension parts such as shock ab- to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle ● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, speed (traction control function). and hear a noise or vibration from under the
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN ap- hood. This is normal and indicates that the
proved for your vehicle or are extremely ● If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO VDC system is working properly.
deteriorated, the ABLS system may not the indicator light will come on and
● Adjust your speed and driving to the road
operate properly. This could adversely af- the VDC system will be turned off. See “Us-
fect vehicle handling performance, and conditions.
ing four wheel drive (4WD)” earlier in this
the slip indicator light may illuminate. section. See “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic
● If brake related parts such as brake Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru-
● Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
pads, rotors and calipers are not ments and controls” section.
and engine output to help the driver maintain
NISSAN recommended or are extremely control of the vehicle in the following condi- If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
deteriorated, the ABLS system may not tions:
operate properly and the slip indicator and indicator lights come on in the instru-
light may illuminate. – understeer (vehicle tends to not follow ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns
the steered path despite increased steer- off when these indicator lights are on.
● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the ABLS ing input) The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
system may not operate properly and – oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to system. The indicator illuminates to indi-
the slip indicator light may illuminate. certain road or driving conditions) cate the VDC system is off.


When the VDC switch is used to turn off the ● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. ● When driving on extremely inclined sur-
system, the VDC system still operates to prevent If suspension parts such as shock ab- faces such as higher banked corners,
one drive wheel from slipping by transferring sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, the VDC system may not operate prop-
power to a non slipping drive wheel. The bushings and wheels are not NISSAN erly and the indicator may flash or
indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC recommended for your vehicle or are
both the and indicator
functions are off and the indicator will not extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
lights may illuminate. Do not drive on
flash. may not operate properly. This could
these types of roads.
adversely affect vehicle handling per-
The VDC system is automatically reset to on formance, and the indicator may ● When driving on an unstable surface
when the ignition switch is placed in the off such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
flash or both the and indi-
position then back to the on position. ramp, the indicator may flash or
cator lights may illuminate.
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature both the and indicator
● If brake related parts such as brake
that tests the system each time you start the lights may illuminate. This is not a mal-
pads, rotors and calipers are not
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse function. Restart the engine after driv-
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you ing onto a stable surface.
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in operate properly and both the ● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an recommended ones are used, the VDC
and the indicator lights may
indication of a malfunction. illuminate. system may not operate properly and
the indicator may flash or both
WARNING ● If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely the and indicator lights may
● The VDC system is designed to help the illuminate.
driver maintain stability but does not deteriorated, both the and
indicator lights may illuminate. ● The VDC system is not a substitute for
prevent accidents due to abrupt steer- winter tires or tire chains on a snow
ing operation at high speeds or by care- covered road.
less or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.


REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if so
equipped)

● The system is designed as an aid to the will sound for only three seconds. Once the sys-
driver in detecting large stationary ob- tem detects an object approaching, the tone will
jects to help avoid damaging the ve- sound again.
hicle. The system will not detect small The RSS automatically turns on when the shift
objects below the bumper, and may not selector is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition
detect objects close to the bumper or is ON. The RSS OFF switch on the instrument
on the ground. panel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off.
● If your vehicle sustains damage to the To turn the RSS off, the ignition must be ON, and
rear bumper fascia, leaving it mis- the shift selector in R (Reverse). An indicator light
aligned or bent, the sensing zone may on the switch will illuminate when the system is
be altered causing inaccurate measure- turned off. If the indicator light illuminates when
ment of obstacles or false alarms. the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a mal-
function in the RSS.
The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone to
WSD0103 Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bum-
warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper per fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumu-
WARNING when the shift selector is in R (Reverse). The lations of dirt (do not clean the sensors with sharp
system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 objects). If the sensors are covered, it will affect
● Always turn and look back before back- mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular
ing up. The RSS is not a substitute for the accuracy of the RSS.
or moving objects.
proper backing procedures.
The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 feet (1.8 m)
● Read and understand the limitations of
the rear sonar system as contained in from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage
this section. Inclement weather may af- area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to
fect the function of the RSS; this may the illustration for approximate zone coverage
include reduced performance or a false areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the
activation. rate of the tone increases. When the obstacle is
less than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tone will
● This system is not designed to prevent sound continuously. If the RSS detects a station-
contact with small or moving objects.
ary or receding object further than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone


COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER 3. Tire chains may be used. For details see
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de- If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- yourself” section of this manual.
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the
equipped). It is recommended that the following items be
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
carried in the vehicle during winter:
ANTI-FREEZE manual.
● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem- TIRE EQUIPMENT ice and snow from the windows and wiper
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to blades.
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
provide superior performance on dry pave- ● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the
ment. However, the performance of these jack to give it firm support.
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual. tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve- ● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
BATTERY hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom- ● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL washer fluid reservoir.
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi- consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked size, speed rating and availability informa-
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main- tion. WARNING
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded ● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
manual. tires may be used. However, some U.S. very cold snow or ice can be slick and
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
use. Check local, state and provincial laws have much less traction or “grip” under
before installing studded tires. these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
Skid and traction capabilities of studded sanded.
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau- ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so To use the engine block heater:
tion. Accelerate and slow down with equipped) 1. Turn the engine off.
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
WARNING
more traction. heater cord.
● Do not use your engine block heater
● Allow more stopping distance under 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
with an ungrounded electrical system
these conditions. Braking should be grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-
started sooner than on dry pavement. cord.
riously injured by an electrical shock if
● Allow greater following distances on you use an ungrounded connection. 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
slippery roads. ● Disconnect and properly store the en- Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
gine block heater cord before starting volt AC (VAC) outlet.
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise the engine. Damage to the cord could 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of result in an electrical shock and can for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside
ice is seen ahead, brake before reach- cause serious injury. temperatures, to properly warm the engine
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice, ● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex- coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
and avoid any sudden steering tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug engine block heater on.
maneuvers. the extension cord into a Ground Fault 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-
● Do not use the cruise control (if so Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded erly store the cord to keep it away from
equipped) on slippery roads. 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the moving parts.
proper extension cord or a grounded
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust outlet can result in a fire or electrical
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow shock and cause serious personal
clear of the exhaust pipe and from injury.
around your vehicle.
Engine block heaters are available through
NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature
starting. The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or
lower.


6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING WARNING ● Replacing tires with those not originally
SYSTEM (TPMS) ● If the low tire pressure warning light
proper operation of the TPMS.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres- steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road tire sealant into the tires, as this may
tire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECK to a safe location and stop the vehicle cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under- sensors.
information display, one or more of your tires is inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the sys-
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
tem also displays pressure of all tires (except the
could occur and may lead to an acci-
spare tire) on the display screen by sending a low:
dent and could result in serious per-
signal from a sensor that is installed in each sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire Stopping the vehicle
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of the recommended COLD tire pressure 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
it by the low tire pressure warning light. This shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- away from traffic.
system will activate only when the vehicle is tion label to turn the low tire pressure
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
more details, refer to “Warning/indicator lights replace it with a spare tire as soon as 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and possible. brake. Move the shift selector to P (Park).
controls” section, “Tire pressure information” in
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel 4. Turn off the engine.
the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio is replaced, tire pressure will not be
and phone systems” section and “Tire Pressure indicated, the TPMS will not function 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and and the low tire pressure warning light signal professional road assistance person-
driving” section. will flash for approximately 1 minute. nel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting. and clear of the vehicle.

6-2 In case of emergency

WARNING Getting the spare tire and tools
● Make sure the parking brake is securely 1. Fold up the rear bench seat. Refer to “Fold-
applied and the automatic transmission ing the rear bench seat” in the “Safety –
is shifted into P (Park). Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint
system” section of this manual.
● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
sional road assistance.

WCE0044
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks ᭺ at both the front and
1
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire
᭺ to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
2
jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

In case of emergency 6-3

LCE0093 WCE0150 WCE0151
2. Unscrew and remove the jack and tool kit. 3. Assemble the two pieces of the jack rod. 4. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the
Find the oval-shaped opening above the square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form
middle of the license plate. Pass the a handle.
T-shaped end of the jack rod through the
opening and direct it toward the spare tire 5. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into
winch, located directly above the spare tire. the T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap-
ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in
CAUTION the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod
counterclockwise to lower the spare tire.
Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is
designed to be inserted at an angle as 6. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,
shown. reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer
chain, and carefully slide the tire from under
the rear of the vehicle.


CAUTION ● Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-
vehicle to move. This is especially true
ing plate on the wheel and then lift the
for vehicles with limited slip
spare tire.
differentials.
Jacking up vehicle and removing the ● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
damaged tire vehicle while it is on the jack.
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
WARNING the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
● Never get under the vehicle while it is move.
supported only by the jack. If it is nec- Always refer to the illustration for the correct
essary to work under the vehicle, sup- placement and jack-up points for your specific
port it with safety stands. vehicle model and jack type.
● Use only the jack provided with your Carefully read the caution label attached to
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the the jack body and the following instruc-
jack provided with your vehicle on other tions.
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change. 1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
● Use the correct jack-up points. Never wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
use any other part of the vehicle for jack until the tire is off the ground.
support.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.


WCE0152 LCE0087
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up The jack should be used on firm and 3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack
point as illustrated so the top of the jack level ground. as shown.
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The 4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
jack-up points are indicated by stamped ar- and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the
rows on the side of the frame. tire clears the ground.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the
tire.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel specification at all times. It is recom-
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
in the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve- specifications at each lubrication interval.
hicle completely.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
WARNING COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly parked for three hours or more or driven
tightened wheel nuts can cause the less than 1 mi. (1.6 km).
wheel to become loose or come off. COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire
This could cause an accident.
and Loading Information label affixed to
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel the driver side center pillar.
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose. After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD
WCE0063
tire pressure, the display (if so equipped) of
Installing the spare tire ● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve- the tire pressure information may show
hicle has been driven for 600 miles higher pressure than the COLD tire pres-
The spare tire is designed for emergency (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, sure after the vehicle has been driven more
use. See specific instructions under the etc.). than 1 mi. (1.6 km). This is because the tire
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts pressure increases as the tire temperature
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this
to the specified torque with a torque rises. This does not indicate a system mal-
manual.
wrench. function.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
Wheel nut tightening torque: 5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-
tween the wheel and hub.
98 ft-lb (133 N·m) ment in the vehicle.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until
they are tight.

JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, the ● Whenever working on or near a battery,
WARNING
instructions and precautions below must be fol- always wear suitable eye protectors (for
● Always make sure that the spare tire lowed. example, goggles or industrial safety
and jacking equipment are properly se-
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
cured after use. Such items can become WARNING bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can over the battery when jump starting.
sudden stop.
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in ● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
● The spare tire is designed for emer- severe injury or death. It could also battery. It could explode and cause se-
gency use. See specific instructions un- damage your vehicle. rious injury.
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” ● Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-
section of this manual. ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all
sparks and flames away from the
battery.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, imme-
diately flush the contacted area with
water.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.


● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-
hicle at about 2,000 RPM, and start the
engine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
WCE0054 more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so not start right away, turn the key off and
WARNING wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
Always follow the instructions below. cloth to reduce explosion hazard. 7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-
Failure to do so could result in damage to nect the negative cable and then the positive
the charging system and cause personal 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-
cable.
injury. lustrated (᭺, ᭺, ᭺, ᭺).
A B C D
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, CAUTION sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
position the two vehicles to bring their bat- the vent holes as it may be contaminated
● Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive
teries near each other. with corrosive acid.
(ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-
lector to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary
electrical systems (lights, heater, air condi-
tioner, etc.).

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
WARNING WARNING
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
Do not push start this vehicle. The three- ● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-
way catalyst may be damaged. overheats. Doing so could cause engine ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
damage or a vehicle fire. open the hood further until no steam or
CAUTION ● To avoid the danger of being scalded, coolant can be seen.
Automatic transmission models cannot never remove the radiator or coolant 4. Open the engine hood.
be push-started or tow-started. Attempt- reservoir cap while the engine is still
ing to do so may cause transmission hot. When the radiator or coolant reser- WARNING
damage. voir cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing If steam or water is coming from the en-
serious injury. gine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
● Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out. 5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an running. The radiator hoses and radiator
extremely high temperature gauge reading and should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the illumination of the engine oil pressure/engine the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
coolant temperature high indicator light), or if you the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-
feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal gine.
noise, etc. take the following steps.
WARNING
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift selector Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
to P (Park). jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
Do not stop the engine. engine cooling fan. The engine cooling
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the fan can start at any time.
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool- When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in For information about towing your vehicle behind
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank Canada) and local regulations for towing must be a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
with the engine running. Add coolant to the followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam- in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail- tion of this manual.
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
dealer. tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:

WARNING
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
● When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.


Two-wheel drive models If the speed or distance must necessarily be
greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed to prevent damage to the transmission.
with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION
● Never tow automatic transmission
models with the rear wheels on the
ground or four wheels on the ground
(forward or backward), as this may
cause serious and expensive damage to
the transmission. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the front wheels
raised always use towing dollies under
the rear wheels.
● When towing automatic transmission
models with the front wheels on the
ground or on towing dollies:
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
ACE1019 with a rope or similar device. Never
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY secure the steering wheel by placing
the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
NISSAN tion. This may cause damage to the
lock mechanism (if so equipped).


WCE0161 LCE0083

Four-wheel drive models Hooks (if so equipped)

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
used when towing your vehicle or place the ve- vehicle)
hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
Pulling a stuck vehicle
CAUTION
WARNING
Never tow 4WD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-
serious and expensive damage to the sonal injury or death when recovering a
transfer case and transmission. stuck vehicle:
● Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.


● Attach recovery devices only to main Rocking a stuck vehicle ● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
structural members of the vehicle or the to maintain the rocking motion.
recovery hooks. WARNING ● Release the accelerator pedal before
● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow ● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. shifting between R and D.
or free a stuck vehicle. ● Do not spin your tires at high speed. ● Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55
● Only use devices specifically designed This could cause them to explode and km/h) or above 12 MPH (20 km/h) if the
for vehicle recovery and follow the result in serious injury. Parts of your E–Lock System is engaged.
manufacturer’s instructions. vehicle could also overheat and be 6. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
damaged.
● Always pull the recovery device straight tries, contact a professional towing service
out from the front of the vehicle. Never If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., to remove the vehicle.
pull at an angle. use the following procedure:
● Route recovery devices so they do not 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
touch any part of the vehicle except the system.
attachment point.
2. Activate the Electronic Locking Rear Differ-
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., ential (E-Lock) System (if so equipped).
use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-
cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the 3. Make sure the area in front and behind the
manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de- vehicle is clear of obstructions.
vice. 4. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or an area around the front tires.
vehicle recovery. 5. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive).


7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Environmental factors influence the rate of
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve- the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
CAUTION
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it. must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
● Do not use car washes that use acid in drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your the detergent. Some car washes, espe- open. Spray water under the body and in the
vehicle as soon as you can: cially brushless ones, use some acid for wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage cleaning. The acid may react with some road salt.
from acid rain. plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
● after driving on coastal roads. appearance, and also could cause them avoid water spots.
not to function properly. Always check WAXING
● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
with your car wash to confirm that acid
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get is not used. Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
on the paint surface. helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong recommended to remove built-up wax residue
● when dust or mud builds up on the surface. household soap, strong chemical deter- and to avoid a weathered appearance before
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle gents, gasoline or solvents. re-applying wax.
inside a garage or in a covered area. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as proper product.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
the surface may become water-spotted.
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body ● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
cover. ● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface wax.
must be taken when removing
when putting on or removing the body caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- ● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cover. stances so the paint surface is not cutting compounds or cleaners that may
scratched or damaged. damage the vehicle finish.
WASHING
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
finish or leave swirl marks.
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
(never hot) water.
7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS CAUTION CHROME PARTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, When cleaning the inside of the windows, Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
staining. Special cleaning products are available cleaners. They could damage the electri-
TIRE DRESSINGS
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory cal conductors, radio antenna elements or NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
store. rear window defroster elements. dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
UNDERBODY ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp- react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in ened in a mild soap solution, especially during
stain the vehicle paint.
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un- not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels. If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe- following precautions:
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must CAUTION ● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
be checked and, if necessary, retreated. Follow the directions below to avoid ing on the tire dissolves more easily than
GLASS staining or discoloring the wheels: with an oil-based tire dressing.
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong ● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
acid or alkali contents to clean the prevent it from entering the tire
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
wheels.
become coated with a film after the vehicle is remove).
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft ● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
cloth will easily remove this film. wheels when they are hot. The wheel ● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
temperature should be the same as am- towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
bient temperature. pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove ● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
cleaner is applied.

Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior ● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
CAUTION
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum the vents. These products can cause imme-
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and ● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi- diate damage and discoloration when
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp- lar material. spilled on interior surfaces.
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a ● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-
dry, soft cloth. damaging to leather surfaces and structions before using the air fresheners.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to should be removed promptly. Do not
maintain the appearance of the leather. use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, FLOOR MATS
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu- gents or ammonia-based cleaners as WARNING
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro- they may damage the leather’s natural
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or To avoid potential pedal interference that
finish. may result in a collision or injury:
bleach the seat material.
● Never use fabric protectors unless rec- ● NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean ommended by the manufacturer.
the meter and gauge lens. other floor mat in the driver front
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on position.
WARNING meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam- ● Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats
age the lens cover. specifically designed for use in your ve-
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
hicle model. See your NISSAN dealer
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can AIR FRESHENERS for more information.
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensor. This can also affect the opera- Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect ● Properly position the mats in the floor-
tion of the air bag system and result in the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, well using the floor mat positioning aid.
serious personal injury. take the following precautions: See ؆Floor mat positioning aid؆ in this
● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per- section.
manent discoloration when they contact ve- The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh- tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
ener in a location that allows it to hang free easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-
and not contact an interior surface. tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they
become excessively worn.


CORROSION PROTECTION

SEAT BELTS MOST COMMON FACTORS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. CORROSION
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance” ● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen- and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
tal restraint system” section of this manual. and other areas.
● Damage to paint and other protective coat-
WARNING ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the minor traffic accidents.
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
since these materials may severely INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
LAI0009 weaken the seat belt webbing. CORROSION
Floor mat positioning aid Moisture
This vehicle includes two driver’s side front floor
mat brackets and one passenger’s side front floor Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-
mat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place. hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been specially Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
designed for your vehicle model. The driver’s side the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
floor mat has two grommet holes incorporated in avoid floor panel corrosion.
it and the passenger’s side has one grommet
hole. Position each mat by placing the floor mat
Relative humidity
bracket hook through the floor mat grommet Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
holes while centering the mat in the floorwell. relative humidity, especially those areas where
Periodically check to make certain the mats are the temperatures stay above freezing and where
properly positioned. atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.

Appearance and care 7-5

Temperature CAUTION
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro- ● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated. bris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
Air pollution dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air ● Never allow water or other liquids to
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler- come in contact with electronic compo-
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel- nents inside the vehicle as this may
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces. damage them.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
FROM CORROSION extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the and deterioration of underbody components
vehicle clean. such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
● Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation. For additional protection against rust and corro-
● Check the underbody for accumulation of sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water sult a NISSAN dealer.


8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Keyfob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini- Performing general maintenance checks requires During the normal day-to-day operation of the
mum maintenance requirements with long ser- minimal mechanical skill and only a few general vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
vice intervals to save you both time and money. automotive tools. formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
However, some day-to-day and regular mainte- These checks or inspections can be done by you, you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
good mechanical condition, as well as its emis- dealer. NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
sions and engine performance. should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
Where to go for service repairs are required.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general If maintenance service is required or your vehicle When performing any checks or maintenance
maintenance, is performed. appears to malfunction, have the systems work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
tions” later in this section.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte- information through technical bulletins, service MAINTENANCE ITEMS
nance chain. tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve- Additional information on the following
Scheduled maintenance items with “ * ” is found later in this section.
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
For your convenience, both required and optional than after they have worked on it.
scheduled maintenance items are described and
Outside the vehicle
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
The maintenance items listed here should be
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure service department performs the best job to meet
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
that necessary maintenance is performed on your specified.
in a reliable and economical way.
NISSAN at regular intervals.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
General maintenance and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
General maintenance includes those items which that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
should be checked during normal day-to-day op- latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op- Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these hood from opening when the primary latch is
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed. released.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When driving in areas using road salt or other alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at Automatic transmission P (Park) position
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your
needed. vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail ● For additional information regarding tires,
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-
operating properly and installed securely. Also (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-
check headlight aim. the Warranty Information Booklet. ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, basis. Check the windshield at least every six
away from the pedal.
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-
necessary. aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
facility. vehicle to one side when applied.
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km). Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-
wear if they do not wipe properly. tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces- Inside the vehicle applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
The maintenance items listed here should be see a NISSAN dealer.
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear. checked on a regular basis, such as when per- Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve- adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) hicle, etc. operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
transmitter components Replace the TPMS every position. Check that the head restraints
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap Additional information on the following
move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age. items with an “*” is found later in this sec-
equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
tion.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
should pull to either side while driving on a Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or operation and make sure the pedal does not bind and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away and are installed securely. Check the belt web-
from the pedal. bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer- Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard when the engine is cold. radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
steering or strange noises. etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
connections.
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
posed to corrosive substances such as those
the wipers and washer operate properly and that Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
the wipers do not streak. back into the oil pan.
important to remove these substances from the
Windshield defroster Check that the air Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of end of winter, the underbody should be thor-
air conditioner. exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See
Under the hood and vehicle carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and the “Appearance and care” section of this
The maintenance items listed here should be driving” section of this manual. manual.
checked periodically (for example, each time you Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is
check the engine oil or refuel). water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has adequate fluid in the reservoir.
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve- air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
hicles operated in high temperatures or under notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
severe conditions require frequent checks of the check for the cause and have it corrected imme-
battery fluid level. diately.
Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brake fluid Power steering fluid level* and lines Check
level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
reservoir. off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
cracks, etc.


MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance ● If you must run the engine in an en- ● Never leave the engine or automatic
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent closed space such as a garage, be sure transmission related component har-
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to there is proper ventilation for exhaust nesses disconnected while the ignition
the vehicle. The following are general precau- gases to escape. switch is in the ON position.
tions which should be closely observed.
● Never get under the vehicle while it is ● Never connect or disconnect the battery
WARNING supported only by a jack. If it is neces- or any transistorized component while
sary to work under the vehicle, support the ignition switch is in the ON position.
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- it with safety stands.
ply the parking brake securely and This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle ● Keep smoking materials, flame and gives instructions regarding only those items
from moving. Move the shift selector to sparks away from the fuel tank and which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
P (Park) battery.
A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-
● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or ● On gasoline engine models, the fuel able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-
LOCK position when performing any filter or fuel lines should be serviced by der information” in the “Technical and consumer
parts replacement or repairs. a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines information” section of this manual.
are under high pressure even when the
● If you must work with the engine run- engine is off. You should be aware that incomplete or improper
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair servicing may result in operating difficulties or
and tools away from moving fans, belts excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
CAUTION
and any other moving parts. coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
● Do not work under the hood while the have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
● It is advisable to secure or remove any engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
loose clothing and remove any jewelry, wait until it cools down.
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle. ● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
● Always wear eye protection whenever oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
you work on your vehicle. fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.


ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS

1. Battery
2. Fuse/fusible link box
3. Transmission dipstick
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Drive belt location
9. Radiator cap
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
11. Engine oil dipstick
12. Engine coolant reservoir
NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0630


ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory ● The life expectancy of the factory-fill
CAUTION
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and ● Never use any cooling system additives
7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-
50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze and such as radiator sealer. Additives may
ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long
coolant protection. The antifreeze solution con- clog the cooling system and cause
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-
tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en- damage to the engine, transmission
ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life
gine cooling system additives are not necessary. and/or cooling system.
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
● When adding or replacing coolant, be of non-distilled water will reduce the
WARNING sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
● Never remove the radiator or coolant Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or ant. Refer to the Nissan Service and
reservoir cap when the engine is hot. equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Maintenance Guide for more details.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted
down. Serious burns could be caused to provide antifreeze protection to -34°
by high pressure fluid escaping from F (-37° C). If additional freeze protec-
the radiator. See precautions in “If your tion is needed due to weather where
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case you operate your vehicle, add Genuine
of emergency” section of this manual. NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) concentrate following the direc-
● The radiator is equipped with a pres- tions on the container. If an equivalent
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
gine damage, use only a genuine Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is
NISSAN radiator cap. used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s
instructions to maintain minimum anti-
freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
may damage the engine cooling
system.


the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life ● Avoid direct skin contact with used
expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
more details. as soon as possible.
The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur- ● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
ized tank. When installing the cap, tighten. dren and pets.
If the cooling system frequently requires Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN Check your local regulations.
dealer.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
LDI0369 The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when ing.
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the WARNING
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is never change the coolant when the en-
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator gine is hot.
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level. ● Never remove the radiator or engine
coolant reservoir cap when the engine
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life is hot. Serious burns could be caused
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of by high pressure fluid escaping from
the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 the radiator.
km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or

ENGINE OIL

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-
erating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.

LDI0370 LDI0371
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be between the H (High) and
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply L (Low) marks ᭺. This is the normal oper-
B
the parking brake.
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches the L (Low) mark ᭺, remove the oil filler cap
A
operating temperature. and pour recommended oil through the
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 opening. Do not overfill ᭺. C

minutes for the oil to drain back into 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
the oil pan.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re- maintenance intervals or during the
insert it all the way. break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.


If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and Drain plug tightening torque:
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine 22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
oil filter” in this section.
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
● Waste oil must be disposed of prop- the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
erly. cap securely.
● Check your local regulations. See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-
WARNING sumer information” section of this manual for
drain and refill capacity.
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer. The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
specifications for reference only. Always use
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
the dipstick to determine when the proper
WDI0504 thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
amount of oil is in the engine.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL 8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-
children.
the parking brake. quired.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches CAUTION 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
operating temperature, then turn it off. minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine Add engine oil if necessary.
3. Remove the oil filler cap ᭺ by turning it
A oil may be hot.
counterclockwise. 6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
᭺.
B a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

5. Remove the drain plug ᭺ with a wrench by
B
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.


5-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION FLUID

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with When checking or replacement is required, we
a clean rag. recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material ● Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. If
remaining on the sealing surface of the Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not
engine. Failure to do so could lead to an available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF
oil leak and engine damage. may also be used.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean ● Using automatic transmission fluid
engine oil. other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S
ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora-
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance tion in driveability and automatic trans-
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn. mission durability, and may damage the
WDI0505 8. Start the engine and check for leakage automatic transmission, which is not
around the oil filter. Correct as required. covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER ited warranty.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if The specified automatic transmission fluid is also
the parking brake. necessary. described on caution labels located in the engine
2. Turn the engine off. compartment.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter ᭺.
A

4. Loosen the oil filter ᭺ with an oil filter
A
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.


POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID

For further brake fluid specification information,
CAUTION
refer to “Capacities and recommended
● DO NOT OVERFILL. fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer
● Recommended fluid is Genuine information” section of this manual.
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
WARNING
● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can damage
the brake system and affect the vehi-
cle’s stopping ability.
● Clean the filler cap before removing.
WDI0256 ● Brake fluid is poisonous and should be
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT stored carefully in marked containers
MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir out of reach of children.
at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -
80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the CAUTION
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-
tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C). Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu- spilled, immediately wash the surface
ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX with water.
depending on system fluid temperature. Remove
the cap and fill through the opening.


WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the paint.
● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concen-
LDI0374 WDI0405
trates at full strength. Some methyl al-
BRAKE FLUID WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID cohol based washer fluid concentrates
RESERVOIR may permanently stain the grille if
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the spilled while filling the windshield-
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi- washer fluid reservoir.
warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT ● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on water to the manufacturer’s recom-
3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added
(if so equipped). mended levels before pouring the fluid
frequently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer. To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift into the windshield-washer fluid reser-
the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield- voir. Do not use the windshield-washer
washer fluid into the reservoir opening. fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid
concentrate and water.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for the mixture ratio.

BATTERY

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. ● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
Clean the battery with a solution of baking the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
soda and water. cause a higher load on the battery
● Make certain the terminal connections are which can generate heat, reduce bat-
clean and securely tightened. tery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
● When working on or near a battery, al-
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
ways wear suitable eye protection and
terminal cable to prevent discharge. remove all jewelry.
WARNING ● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
● Do not expose the battery to flames, an pounds. Wash hands after handling.
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-
gen gas generated by the battery is ex- ● Keep battery out of the reach of WDI0224
plosive. Explosive gases can cause children.
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as
blindness or injury. Do not allow battery ● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics caps tight and the battery level. case.
or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or injury. After touch-
ing a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.


VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0566

CAUTION
● Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will by-
pass the variable voltage control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
WDI0529 ● Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is vehicle battery.
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage
the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall control system. This system measures the
the vent caps. amount of electrical discharge from the battery
and controls voltage generated by the generator.


DRIVE BELT

The current sensor ᭺ is located near the battery
A 1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
along the negative battery cable. If you add elec- wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced
ground them to a suitable body ground such as or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
the frame or engine block area.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-
tion and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0661
1. Power steering fluid pump
2. Automatic belt tensioner
3. Water pump
4. Cooling fan
5. Air conditioner compressor
6. Crankshaft pulley
7. Generator
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.


SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.

SDI1895 WDI0712

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
Platinum-tipped spark plugs log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-
It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped ᭺
A nance Guide.”
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type To remove the air cleaner filter:
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN ᭺
1 Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service cover upward.
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re- 2. Remove the air cleaner filter.
gapping.
3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-
● Always replace spark plugs with rec- ing and the cover with a damp cloth.
ommended or equivalent ones.


NOTE: To replace the filter, perform the following proce-
dure:
After installing a new air cleaner, make
sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the
housing and latch the clips.

WARNING
● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working WDI0619
on the engine with the air cleaner 1. Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins
removed. ᭺. Remove the glove box from the opening
A
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or and let it hang by the cord.
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. Refer to the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for
change intervals.


WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then
rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-
LDI0387 LDI0404
shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades
and using the wiper, replace the blades.
2. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove the NOTE:
filter cover. CAUTION
The filters are marked with air flow arrows.
The end of the filter with the arrow should Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows age the windshield and impair driver
should face downward. vision.
3. Insert the first filter into the housing and slide
it over to the right. Insert the second filter
into the housing.
4. Replace the filter cover.
5. Install the glove box door.
6. Fill out the date information on the small
replacement label and attach it to the glove
box lid.

6. Return the wiper to its original position and
release it until it has made contact with the
windshield.

CAUTION
● After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
aged from wind pressure.

WDI0408

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
᭺
2 Push the release tab, then move the wiper
blade down the wiper arm to remove.
᭺
3 Remove the wiper blade. WDI0629

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not
arm until it clicks into place. to let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle
᭺. This may cause clogging or improper wind-
A
5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the shield washer operation. If wax gets into the
groove. nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin ᭺.
B


BRAKES FUSES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the Proper brake inspection intervals should
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer. be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-
Self-adjusting brakes nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting vice and Maintenance Guide”.
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.
LDI0455
Brake pad wear indicators Two types of fuses are used. Type ᭺ is used in
A
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-
᭺ is used in the passenger compartment fuse
B
box.
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the are stored in the passenger compartment fuse
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes box.
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-
sound is heard. partment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.

LDI0457 LDI0380
If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse, ENGINE COMPARTMENT
the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not CAUTION
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely. Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under- fuse box cover. This could damage the
hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the electrical system or cause a fire.
underhood fuse boxes.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.


3. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

WDI0452 LDI0618
5. If the fuse is open ᭺, replace it with a new
A PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
fuse ᭺.B

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical CAUTION
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
dealer. amperage rating than specified on the
Fusible links fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible If any electrical equipment does not operate,
links. If any of these fusible links are melted, check for an open fuse.
replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts. 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the glove box to access the fuse box
cover.

WDI0452 LDI0456 LDI2035
Type A Type B Extended storage switch
5. If the fuse is open ᭺, replace it with an
A
equivalent good fuse ᭺.
B If any electrical equipment does not operate,
remove the extended storage switch and check
6. Push the fuse box cover to install. for an open fuse.
7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN NOTE:
dealer. The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-
tended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.


BATTERY REPLACEMENT

How to replace the extended storage switch:
CAUTION
1. To remove the extended storage switch, be Be careful not to allow children to swallow
sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or the battery or removed parts.
LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF
position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the locking tabs ᭺ found on each
1
side of the storage switch.
5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the
fuse box ᭺.2


● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric
terminals as it could cause a malfunction.
● When changing the battery, do not let dust
or oil get on the keyfob.
● There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat-
tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only
with the same or equivalent type.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.
᭺
4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then the
button two or three times to check the key-
fob operation.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
● An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-
ever, if it does get wet, immediately
LDI2026
wipe completely dry.
KEYFOB (if so equipped) ᭺
3 Install a new battery ᭺ with the “+” facing
C
● The operational range of the keyfob
down.
Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows: extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the from the vehicle. This range may vary
᭺
1 Open the lid using a coin ᭺.
A
battery across the contact points will seri- with conditions.
᭺
2 Remove the battery ᭺.
B ously deplete the storage capacity.


LIGHTS

FCC Notice: HEADLIGHTS NOTE:
For USA: Replacing the halogen headlight bulb Use the same number and wattage as
This device complies with Part 15 of the shown in the chart.
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be- Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this cause the headlight assembly must be removed exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
device must accept any interference re- from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your temperature difference between the inside and
ceived, including interference that may NISSAN dealer. the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
cause undesired operation. Note: Changes a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
or modifications not expressly approved by CAUTION inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
the party responsible for compliance could ● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
void the user’s authority to operate the FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
equipment. break if the glass envelope is scratched Replacing the fog light bulb
For Canada: or the bulb is dropped.
This device complies with RSS-210 of In- ● When handling the bulb, do not touch CAUTION
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the the glass envelope.
following two conditions: (1) this device ● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
may not cause interference, and (2) this ● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
device must accept any interference, in- HANDS. break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
cluding interference that may cause unde- ● Do not leave the bulb out of the head-
sired operation of the device. light reflector for a long period of time ● When handling the bulb, do not touch
as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the glass envelope.
the headlight body and affect the per- ● Use the same number and wattage as
formance of the headlight. originally installed as shown in the
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing chart.
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.


● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light NOTE:
for a long period of time as dust, mois- To adjust the fog light vertical aim: Access
ture and smoke may enter the fog light the aiming screw from underneath the front
body and affect the performance of the bumper. The aiming screw is located on the
fog light. bottom of the fog light housing. Turn the
screw clockwise to raise the pattern. Turn
the screw counterclockwise to lower the
pattern.

LDI0382
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
2. The fog light is accessible in front of the
front tire and behind the bumper.
3. Disconnect the bulb connector ᭺.
1

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and re-
move.
5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the fog
light assembly. Do not shake or rotate the
bulb when removing it. Do not touch the
glass envelope.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.


EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.
Headlight assembly
High 65 9005 (HB3)
Low 55 9006 (HB4)
Park/Turn 28/8 3457K
Sidemarker 3.8 194
Side turn signal light* (if so equipped) — LED
Front fog light (if so equipped) 27.5 880
Puddle light (if so equipped) 9 906LF
Room/map lights (front) 6 –
Personal lights 8 AL67
Footwell (if so equipped) 3.4 158
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) 1.8 –
Step light (if so equipped) 3.8 194
High-mounted stop light/cargo lights* 12.8 912LF
Rear combination light
Tail/Stop 27/8 3157K
Backup (reversing) 18 921LF
Turn 27 3156K
Tailgate light (if so equipped) 18 921
License plate light 5 W5W

* See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.


1. Room/map light (if so equipped)
2. Personal lights (if so equipped)
3. Step light (if so equipped)
4. Puddle light/Side turn signal light (if so
equipped)
5. High-mount stoplight/cargo lights
6. License plate light
7. Rear combination/tailgate light (if so
equipped) assembly
8. Fog light (if so equipped)
9. Headlight assembly

WDI0263

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp
and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
WDI0409
Indicates bulb installation

LDI0364 LDI0385
Personal lights (If so equipped) Vanity mirror (If so equipped)
Use a cloth ᭺ to protect the housing.
1 Use a cloth ᭺ to protect the housing.
1

LDI0389
Interior/map lights
1


LDI0341 LDI0388 WDI0411
Step light (If so equipped) Puddle light (If so equipped) License plate light
1 Use a cloth ᭺ to protect the housing.
1


WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the For more details, refer to
“In case of emergency” section of this “Warning/Indicator Lights and Audible
manual. Reminders” in the “Instruments and con-
TIRE PRESSURE trols” section, “Tire pressure information”
in the “Display screen, heater, air condi-
Tire Pressure Monitoring System tioner, audio and phone systems” section,
(TPMS) “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It tion, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section.
monitors tire pressure of all 4 tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure Tire inflation pressure
warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE Check the tire pressures (including the
PRESSURE warning appears in the ve- spare) often and always prior to long dis-
hicle information display, one or more of tance trips. The recommended tire pres-
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If sure specifications are shown on the
equipped, the system also displays pres- F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
sure of all tires (except the spare tire) on or the Tire and Loading Information label
the display screen by sending a signal under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.
from a sensor that is installed in each The Tire and Loading Information label is
LDI0410 wheel. affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire
Rear combination light pressures should be checked regularly
The TPMS will activate only when the
because:
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de- ● Most tires naturally lose air over time.
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).


● Tires can lose air suddenly when WARNING ● For additional information re-
driven over potholes or other objects garding tires, refer to “Important
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while ● Improperly inflated tires can fail Tire Safety Information” (US) or
parking. suddenly and cause an accident. “Tire Safety Information”
The tire pressures should be checked ● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
(GVWR) is located on the mation Booklet.
when the tires are cold. The tires are F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
considered COLD after the vehicle has tion label. The vehicle weight ca-
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven pacity is indicated on the Tire and
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate Loading Information label. Do
speeds. not load your vehicle beyond this
capacity. Overloading your ve-
Incorrect tire pressure, including un- hicle may result in reduced tire
der inflation, may adversely affect life, unsafe operating conditions
tire life and vehicle handling. due to premature tire failure, or
unfavorable handling character-
istics and could also lead to a
serious accident. Loading be-
yond the specified capacity may
also result in failure of other ve-
hicle components.
● Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.


᭺
5 Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” later
in this section.
᭺
6 Spare tire size.

LDI0485

Tire and loading information label ᭺
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
᭺
1 Seating capacity: The maximum num- Tires are considered COLD after the
ber of occupants that can be seated vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
in the vehicle. hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
᭺
2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor- km) at moderate speeds. The recom-
mation in the “Technical and con- mended cold tire inflation is set by the
sumer information” section. manufacturer to provide the best bal-
ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,
᭺
3 Original tire size: The size of the tires driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the
originally installed on the vehicle at vehicle’s GVWR.
the factory.


3. Remove the gauge. Size Cold Tire Inflation
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge Pressure
stem and compare to the specifica- Front Original Tire:
tion shown on the Tire and Loading P265/70R18
Information label. 240 kPa, 35 PSI
P275/70R18
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too P275/60R20
much air is added, press the core of Rear Original Tire:
the valve stem briefly with the tip of P265/70R18
the gauge stem to release pressure. 240 kPa, 35 PSI
P275/70R18
Recheck the pressure and add or P275/60R20
release air as needed. Spare Tire:
LDI0393 6. Install the valve stem cap. P265/70R18
240 kPa, 35 PSI
Checking tire pressure P275/70R18
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
P275/60R20
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the including the spare.
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem side-
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.


WDI0394 WDI0395
Example Example
TIRE LABELING ᭺ Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
1 4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de- 5. Two-digit number (15): This number
place standardized information on the signed for passenger vehicles (not all is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
sidewall of all tires. This information iden- tires have this information). 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
tifies and describes the fundamental number is the tire’s load index. It is a
characteristics of the tire and also pro- 2. Three-digit number (215): This num- measurement of how much weight
vides the tire identification number (TIN) ber gives the width in millimeters of each tire can support. You may not
for safety standard certification. The TIN the tire from sidewall edge to side- find this information on all tires be-
can be used to identify the tire in case of a wall edge. cause it is not required by law.
recall. 3. Two-digit number (65): This number, 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
known as the aspect ratio, gives the drive the vehicle faster than the tire
tire’s ratio of height to width. speed rating.

᭺ Tire ply composition and material
3

The number of layers or plies of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
᭺ Maximum permissible inflation pres-
4
sure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible in-
WDI0396 flation pressure.
Example
᭺ TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
2 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code ᭺ Maximum load rating
5

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX (Optional). This number indicates the maximum load
XXXX) 5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac- in kilograms and pounds that can be car-
ture. ried by the tire. When replacing the tires
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart- on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
ment Of Transportation”. The symbol 6. Four numbers represent the week the same load rating as the factory in-
can be placed above, below or to the and year the tire was built. For ex- stalled tire.
left or right of the Tire Identification ample, the numbers 3103 means the
Number. 31st week of 2003. If these numbers ᭺ Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
6

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s are missing, then look on the other Indicates whether the tire requires an in-
identification mark. sidewall of the tire. ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

᭺ The word “radial”
7 TYPES OF TIRES ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has WARNING on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
radial structure. traction than All Season tires and may be more
● When changing or replacing tires, be
᭺ Manufacturer or brand name
appropriate in some areas.
8 sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and Summer tires
Manufacturer or brand name is shown. construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
Other Tire-related Terminology
tire type, size, speed rating and to provide superior performance on dry roads.
In addition to the many terms that are availability. Summer tire performance is substantially re-
defined throughout this section, Intended duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
● Replacement tires may have a lower
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that speed rating than the factory equipped
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering tires, and may not match the potential If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
the maximum speed rating of the tire. SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the ● Replacing tires with those not originally wheels.
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out- proper operation of the low tire pres-
Snow tires
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical sure warning system. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tire that has a particular side that must ● For additional information regarding tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
always face outward when mounted on a tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
vehicle. formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- adversely affect the safety and handling of your
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- vehicle.
tion Booklet.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
All season tires than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod- ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
els to provide good performance all year, includ-


If you install snow tires, they must be the same signed to meet the minimum clearances between
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
four wheels. body component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
cables). The minimum clearances are determined
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
using the factory equipped tire size. Other types
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners
local, state and provincial laws before installing
when recommended by the tire chain manufac-
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
the possibility of whipping action damage to the
TIRE CHAINS fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-
ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-
CAUTION tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your
vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling WDI0258
Tire chains/cables should not be installed and performance may be adversely affected.
on P275/60R20 size tires. Installation of CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
the tire chains/cables on P275/60R20 size Tire chains must be installed only on the
tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If rear wheels and not on the front wheels. Tire rotation
you plan to use tire chains/cables, you Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
should install P265/70R18 size tires on chains in such conditions can cause damage to every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
your vehicle. the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress. See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear
gency” section in this manual for tire re-
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure paved roads. placing procedures.
they are the proper size for the tires on your
As soon as possible, tighten the
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE wheel nuts to the specified torque
class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on with a torque wrench.
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-

Wheel nut tightening torque: ● The original tires have built-in
98 ft-lb (133 N·m) tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
The wheel nuts must be kept tight- tire(s) should be replaced.
ened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be ● Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
tightened to specification at each over 6 years old checked by a
tire rotation interval. qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be ob-
WARNING vious. Replace the tires as neces-
● After rotating the tires, check and sary to prevent tire failure and
adjust the tire pressure. possible personal injury.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when WDI0259 ● Improper service of the spare tire
the vehicle has been driven for 1. Wear indicator may result in serious personal in-
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in 2. Location mark jury. If it is necessary to repair the
cases of a flat tire, etc.). spare tire, contact a NISSAN
Tire wear and damage dealer.
● Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation. WARNING ● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
● For additional information re- ● Tires should be periodically in- Tire Safety Information” (US) or
garding tires, refer to “Important spected for wear, cracking, bulg- “Tire Safety Information”
Tire Safety Information” (US) or ing or objects caught in the tread. (Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
“Tire Safety Information” If excessive wear, cracks, bulging mation Booklet.
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor- or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
mation Booklet. should be replaced.


Replacing wheels and tires ● If the wheels are changed for any rea- ● Do not install a damaged or deformed
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread son, always replace with wheels which wheel or tire even if it has been re-
have the same off-set dimension. paired. Such wheels or tires could have
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
Wheels of a different off-set could structural damage and could fail with-
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve- out warning.
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the hicle handling characteristics, affect
“Technical and consumer information” section of ● The use of retread tires is not
the VDC system and/or interference
this manual. recommended.
with the brake discs. Such interference
can lead to decreased braking effi- ● For additional information regarding
WARNING ciency and/or early brake pad wear. Re- tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
● The use of tires other than those recom- fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
mended or the mixed use of tires of cal and consumer information” section tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
different brands, construction (bias, of this manual for wheel off-set tion Booklet.
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns dimensions.
can adversely affect the ride, braking, Four-wheel drive models
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
handling, VDC system, ground clear- is replaced, tire pressure will not be
ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain indicated, the TPMS will not function
CAUTION
clearance, speedometer calibration, and the low tire pressure warning light Always use tires of the same type, size,
headlight aim and bumper height. will flash for approximately 1 minute. brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or
Some of these effects may lead to acci- The light will remain on after 1 minute. radial), and tread pattern on all four
dents and could result in serious per- Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
sonal injury. possible for tire replacement and/or circumference difference between tires
● If your vehicle was originally equipped system resetting. on the front and rear axles which will
with 4 tires that were the same size and cause excessive tire wear and may dam-
● Replacing tires with those not originally
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires, age the transmission, transfer case and
install the new tires on the rear axle. differential gears.
proper operation of the TPMS.
Placing new tires on the front axle may
cause loss of vehicle control in some
driving conditions and cause an acci-
dent and personal injury.


If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended Care of wheels
that all four tires be replaced with tires of the
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. ● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
The tire pressure and wheel alignment should to maintain their appearance.
also be checked and corrected as necessary. ● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
Contact a NISSAN dealer. wheel is changed or the underside of the
Wheel balance vehicle is washed.
● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
the wheels.
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal- ● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
anced as required. corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle. ● NISSAN recommends waxing the road
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle wheels to protect against road salt in areas
could lead to mechanical damage. where it is used during winter.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.


MEMO


9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Fuel recommendation Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
(without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Flexible fuel vehicle (FFV) fuel Utili-track™ channel system (if so equipped) . . . . . . 9-16
recommendation (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Truck-camper loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil Crew Cab Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 King Cab models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Special Body vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2012 TITAN OWNER'S MANUAL

More Related Content

What's hot

Viewers also liked

Similar to 2012 TITAN OWNER'S MANUAL

More from Classic Cars Nissan

Recently uploaded

2012 TITAN OWNER'S MANUAL